Canon imageRunner 5065 Specifications

Reference Guide
Please read this guide before operating this product.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
ENG
0
Ot¯
imageRUNNER
5075/5065/5055/5050
Reference Guide
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
• Quick Reference for Basic Operations
• Learn How to Use Your Machine
The Tutorial CD is a teaching aid, designed to help you learn the various
functions of the machine.
• Precautions for Using Your Machine
• Troubleshooting
• Specifications
• Basic Operations
• Copying and Mail Box Instructions
• Sending and Fax Instructions
• Setting Up the Network Connection and
Installing the CD-ROM Software
• Remote User Interface Instructions
• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions
• Network ScanGear Installation and
Instructions
• PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Instructions
• PCL Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
CD-ROM
Guides with this symbol are included on the accompanying
CD-ROM. (See footnote on the next page.)
Easy Operation Guide
Tutorial CD
CD-ROM
Support Guide
Reference Guide
(This Document)
CD-ROM
Copying and Mail Box
Guide
CD-ROM
Sending and Facsimile
Guide
CD-ROM
Network Quick Start Guide
Remote UI Guide
CD-ROM
Network Guide
CD-ROM
Network ScanGear
User's Guide
CD-ROM
PS/PCL/UFR II Printer
Guide
CD-ROM
PCL Driver Guide
CD-ROM
• PS Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• UFR II Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• Mac OS X PS Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• Mac OS X UFR II Printer Driver Installation
and Instructions
• Fax Driver Installation and Instructions
• Installing MEAP Applications and Using the
Login Service
PS Driver Guide
CD-ROM
UFR II Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Mac PS Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Mac UFR II Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Fax Driver Guide
CD-ROM
MEAP SMS Administrator
Guide
CD-ROM
• To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is required. If Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is not installed on
your system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website (http://www.adobe.com).
• The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Chapter 2
Basic Operations
Chapter 3
Optional Equipment
Chapter 4
Customizing Settings
Chapter 5
Checking Job and Device Status
Chapter 6
System Manager Settings
Chapter 7
Routine Maintenance
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Chapter 9
Appendix
Includes the Sample Reports, the Relationship between Original Orientation and
Preprinted Paper Output Chart, and index.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
How To Use This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Keys Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Displays Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Chapter 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Select a Safe Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Moving the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Backing Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Feeder Parts and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Control Panel Power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Shutting Down the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Chapter 2
Basic Operations
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
The Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . 2-6
v
Various Touch Panel Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Adding New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Specifying Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Functions That Conserve Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Displaying a Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Reading Messages from the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Types of Message Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Other Useful Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Frequently Used Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Adjusting the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Entering Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Values in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Using a Login Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Document Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Multifunctional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Chapter 3
Optional Equipment
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Sample System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Available Combination of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document
Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
vi
Finishing Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1. . . . . . . . . 3-23
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Copy Tray-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Procedure before Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Procedure after Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Flow of Additional Functions Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Changing the Password and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Checking the Page Counts on a Control Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Checking and Printing Counter Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Chapter 4
Customizing Settings
What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Specifying Common Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Default Display after Auto Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Tone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Display the Remaining Paper Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Inch Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Paper Select Screen Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Distinguishing LTRR and STMT Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Output Tray Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Image Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Storing an Image Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Checking Image Form Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Erasing an Image Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
User-Defined Text for Page Numbers and Watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Registering User-Defined Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
vii
Editing User-Defined Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Erasing User-Defined Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Standard Local Print Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Reversing the Contrast of the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Alternating the Print Output (Offset Jobs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Copy Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Storing Paper Sizes for the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Setting an Output Tray to Hold Different Paper Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Clean the Original Scanning Area Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Limiting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
Forcing to Output Excess Tab Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Current Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Auto Sleep Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
Time Until the Unit Quiets Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
Daily Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Adjusting the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
Zoom Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
Adjusting Creep (Displacement) Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Fold Placement Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Exposure Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
Character/Background Contrast Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
Automatic Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
Wire Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
Drum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
Displaying the Procedure for Cleaning the Original Scanning Area. . . . . . . .4-67
Chapter 5
Checking Job and Device Status
Checking the Counter and Controller Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Checking Job Status from the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
viii
Checking Job Status from the Print Job Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Checking Copy/Print Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Checking Copy/Print Job Details from the System Monitor Screen. . . . . 5-10
Checking Copy/Print Job Details from the Print Job Screen . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Printing the Copy/Print Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Printing Copy/Print Log from the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Printing the Copy/Print Log from the Print Job Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the System Monitor Screen . . . . 5-14
Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the Print Job Screen. . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Chapter 6
System Manager Settings
Specifying the System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Changing the Password and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Erasing the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Clearing the Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Auto Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Auto Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Auto Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
License Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Copy Set Numbering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Setting System Monitor Screen Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Restricting Access to the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Setting to Allow Secured Printing from the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . 6-31
Setting to Display Job Logs from the System Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
MEAP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Use HTTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Printing Installed Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Registering/Deleting/Printing Delivery Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
ix
Registering Delivery Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Confirming Delivery Destination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Deleting a Delivery Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Printing the Delivery Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44
Setting Automatic Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Setting Manual Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
Restricting the Reception of Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Restoring Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
Restricting the Type of Information That Is Updated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Checking/Printing the Communication Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Checking the Communication Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Printing the Communication Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Initializing All Data/Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Displaying the Current Department ID/User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56
Specifying Encrypted Secured Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Setting to Receive Only Encrypted Secured Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Using a USB Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Using a USB Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Setting the Display Method When Entering a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-60
Forced Secure Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-60
Printer Driver Secure Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-67
Storing Irregular Paper Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-67
Editing Irregular Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-68
Erasing Irregular Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-71
PDL Selection (PnP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
Specifying Settings for All User Inboxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
Setting the Time until Documents Are Automatically Erased . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
Printing upon Storing from the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74
Restricting Printer Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
Chapter 7
Routine Maintenance
Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Loading Tab Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Attaching the One-Touch Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
x
Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Changing the Paper Size for the Paper Deck-AE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Removing Punch Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Manual Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
For the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
For the imageRUNNER 5050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Automatic Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Wire Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Drum Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Cleaning the Original Scanning Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
For the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
For the imageRUNNER 5050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Inside the Upper and Lower Right Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Paper Drawer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Paper Drawers 3 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
xi
Inside the Top Cover of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2
(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Output Delivery Unit of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2
(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Inside the Front Cover of the Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Insertion Unit (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53
Inside the Insertion Unit (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-62
Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-69
Copy Tray-L1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-71
Clearing Staple Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-76
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-76
Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-79
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-84
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-84
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-87
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-95
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
Setting the Limited Functions Mode from the Service Call Message
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-100
When the Power Does Not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-102
Chapter 9
Appendix
Sample Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Copy Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Print Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Device Information Delivery Destination List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Device Information Communication Log Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions . . . . . .9-7
Number of Enterable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Capacity of Various Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper
Output Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
xii
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050. Please read
this manual thoroughly before operating the machine to familiarize yourself with its
capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual, store it in
a safe place for future reference.
How To Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely,
always pay attention to these warnings.
.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use the
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read
these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid
damage to the machine.
.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
xiii
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:
• Touch Panel Display Keys: [Key Name]
Examples:
[Cancel]
[Done]
• Control Panel Keys:
Examples:
Key Icon (Key Name)
(Start)
(Stop)
Displays Used in This Manual
Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when
the optional Universal Send Kit has been activated, and the following optional
equipment is attached to the imageRUNNER 5075: the Super G3 FAX Board, UFR
II/PCL/PS Printer Kit, Saddle Finisher-AD2, and Puncher Unit-AT1.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not
displayed on the touch panel display.
The keys which you should press are marked with a
, as shown below.
When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked.
Select the keys which suit your needs.
Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features].
Press this key for operation.
xiv
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the imageRUNNER 5075
has the following optional equipment attached to it: the Saddle Finisher-AD2 and
Puncher Unit-AT1.
xv
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual
This machine makes effective use of memory to perform print operations efficiently.
For example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to
copy, it can immediately scan the next person's original. You can also print from this
machine, using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these
operations take place in a complex way, so that not only copies, but also various
kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be printed.
To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms "scanning," "printing," and
"copying," used throughout this manual are defined below. When making a copy,
the process of scanning originals and printing copies may be described as separate
functions.
Scanning
Scanning an original to be copied, or
scanning an original to be stored as
data in an inbox.
Printing
Outputting a copy, outputting data stored in an inbox,
or outputting data sent from a personal computer
to the machine.
xvi
Copying
Printing data scanned from an original,
followed by finishing options, such as
stapling.
xvii
Legal Notices
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:
Novell NetWare®: NetWare
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, imageRUNNER, MEAP, and NetSpot are registered
trademarks, and the MEAP logo and imageWARE are trademarks of Canon Inc. in
the United States and may also be trademarks or registered trademarks in other
countries.
Adobe, Adobe Acrobat, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Mac OS and AppleTalk are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Windows and Active Directory are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and other countries.
NetWare® is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
The following fonts are licensed from Bitstream Technologies, Inc.
Dutch 801 Bold, Dutch 801 Roman, Fixed Pitch 810 Courier 10 Pitch/Text.
The following font is a trademark of Bitstream Inc.
Dutch 801
© Copyright 1987, Bitstream Inc., Cambridge Massachusetts USA.
All rights reserved.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
xviii
Before You Start Using This
Machine
1
CHAPTER
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as parts and
their functions, and how to turn ON the main power.
Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Backing Up Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Internal View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Feeder Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Shutting Down the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-1
Installation Location and Handling
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
This section describes precautions for installation location and handling. We
recommend that you read this section prior to using this machine.
Installation Precautions
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
■ Avoid locations subject to temperature and humidity extremes, whether
low or high.
For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters,
humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters, or stoves.
■ Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight.
If this is unavoidable, use curtains to shade the machine. Be sure that the curtains do not
block the machine's ventilation slots or louvers, or interfere with the electrical cord or
power supply.
1-2
Installation Location and Handling
■ Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use. Although sensitivity
to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone may be more noticeable during
extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is
recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a
comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.
■ Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted.
■ Avoid locations near volatile or flammable materials, such as alcohol or
paint thinner.
■ Avoid locations that are subject to vibration.
For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands.
Installation Location and Handling
1-3
■ Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature.
If the room in which the machine is installed is cold but rapidly heated, water droplets
(condensation) may form inside the machine. This may result in a noticeable degradation
in the quality of the copied image, the inability to properly scan an original, or the copies
having no printed image at all.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic
equipment.
Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can
adversely affect the operation of such equipment.
■ Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios, or similar electronic
equipment.
The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception. Insert the power
plug into a dedicated power outlet, and maintain as much space as possible between the
machine and other electronic equipment.
■ Do not remove the machine's leveling feet.
Do not remove the machine's leveling feet after the machine has been installed. If you put
weight on the front of the machine while the drawers or units within the machine are pulled
out, the machine may fall forward. To prevent this from happening, make sure that the
machine's leveling feet are in place.
1-4
Installation Location and Handling
Select a Safe Power Supply
■ Plug the machine into a 120 V AC outlet.
■ Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady
voltage.
■ Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may
cause a fire or electrical shock.
■ The power cord may become damaged if it is often stepped on or if heavy
objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead
to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.
Moving the Machine
■ If you intend to move the machine, even to a location on the same floor of
your building, contact your local authorized Canon dealer beforehand. Do
not attempt to move the machine yourself.
Installation Location and Handling
1-5
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to
which the machine is connected.
Handling Precautions
■ Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Some parts inside the machine are subject to high-voltages and
temperatures. Take adequate precautions when inspecting the inside of
the machine. Do not carry out any inspections not described in this
manual.
■ Be careful not to spill liquid or drop any foreign objects, such as paper
clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into contact
with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit and
result in a fire or electrical shock.
1-6
Installation Location and Handling
■ If there is smoke, or unusual noise, immediately turn the main power
switch OFF, disconnect the power cord from the outlet, and call your local
authorized Canon dealer. Using the machine in this state may cause a fire
or electrical shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the power plug so
that the machine can be disconnected whenever necessary.
■ Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front covers while the
machine is in operation. This might result in paper jams.
■ Do not use flammable sprays, such as spray glue, near the machine. There
is a danger of ignition.
Installation Location and Handling
1-7
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use.
Although sensitivity to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone
may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs,
especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be
appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working
environment, in areas of machine operation.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
■ For safety reasons, turn OFF the control panel power switch of the
machine when it will not be used for a long period of time, such as
overnight. As an added safety measure, turn OFF the main power switch,
and disconnect the power cord when the machine will not be used for an
extended period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.
OFF
1-8
Installation Location and Handling
Backing Up Data
Please regularly back up your important data, as it is possible that a malfunction in
the hard disk may cause received data and stored data to be lost.
Please note that Canon will not be held responsible for any damages caused by the
loss of data.
The data that can be backed up is indicated below.
■ Address Book, Additional Functions settings, forwarding settings, Mail
Box function data (User Inbox data, forms for the Form Composition mode)
For information on backing up (exporting) this data, see Chapter 3, "Customizing
Settings," in the Remote UI Guide.
■ Data that can be backed up using the Device Information Delivery Settings
mode
You can perform temporary backing up of your data by delivering data registered in the
machine to other client machines. For information on the Device Information Delivery
Settings mode, see "Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings," on p. 6-37.
■ Data relating to MEAP
• License files for MEAP applications
For information on backing up (downloading) license files, see the MEAP SMS
Administrator Guide.
• User authentication information registered for the Local Device Authentication system of
SDL (Simple Device Login)/SSO (Single Sign-On)
For information on backing up (exporting) user authentication information, see the MEAP
SMS Administrator Guide.
• Data stored by MEAP applications
You may be able to back up data stored by MEAP applications, depending on the
application. For more information, see the documentation for each MEAP application.
NOTE
If your machine is not connected to a network. it is recommended you print and store
important information such as the Address Book. See Chapter 12, "Printing
Communication Reports," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.
Backing Up Data
1-9
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Data such as the Address Book and Additional Functions settings are stored on the
internal hard disk of the machine.
Parts and Their Functions
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
This section provides you with the names and functions of all the parts on the
outside and inside of the main unit, control panel, and the touch panel display. An
illustration of the machine with some optional equipment attached to it is also
provided. For more information on optional equipment, parts and their functions,
see Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment."
External View
The optional Finisher-AD1 and Puncher Unit-AT1 are attached.
a
b
c
d
e
h
g
f
1-10
Parts and Their Functions
d Main Unit's Upper Right Cover
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically
fed sheet by sheet to the platen glass for
scanning. You can select to scan originals as
two-sided documents with or without being
turned over. (See "Feeder Parts and Functions,"
on p. 1-13.)
b Control Panel
Includes the keys, touch panel display, and
indicators required for operating the machine.
(See "Control Panel Parts and Functions," on p.
1-14.)
c Stack Bypass
Use the stack bypass to feed paper manually
and for loading nonstandard paper stock. (See
"Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass," on p.
2-42.)
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam
inside the main unit. (See "Inside the Upper and
Lower Right Covers," on p. 8-23.)
e Main Power Switch
Press to the "I" side to turn the main power ON.
(See "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on
p. 1-16.)
f Main Unit's Lower Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam
inside the main unit. (See "Inside the Upper and
Lower Right Covers," on p. 8-23.)
g Paper Drawers 3 and 4
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80
g/m2)).
h Paper Drawers 1 and 2
Holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond
(80 g/m2)).
NOTE
For more information on the optional equipment that can be attached to the machine, see
Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment."
The optional Copy Tray-L1 is
attached.
The optional Saddle Finisher-AD2, Puncher
Unit-AT1, Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1, and Paper Deck-AE1 are attached.
Parts and Their Functions
1-11
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
a Feeder
Internal View
The optional Saddle Finisher-AD2 and Puncher Unit-AT1 are attached.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
a Platen Glass
Place originals here when scanning books, thick
originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.
b Toner Replacement Cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge.
(See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p.
7-45.)
c Front Cover
Open this cover to clear a paper jam in the fixing
unit (Unit 1) and duplexing unit (Unit 2). (See
"Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing Unit)," on
p. 8-15.)
d Fixing Unit (Unit 1)
Pull out the fixing unit to clear a paper jam. (See
"Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing Unit)," on
p. 8-15.)
e Duplexing Unit (Unit 2)
Pull out the duplexing unit to clear a paper jam.
(See "Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing
Unit)," on p. 8-15.)
f Test Button
Press this button to periodically test the circuit
breaker.
g Breaker
Detects excess current or leakage current. (See
Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This
Machine," in the Support Guide.)
1-12
Parts and Their Functions
Feeder Parts and Functions
a
b
a
b
c
f
imageRUNNER 5050
e
c
d
g
f
e
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
CAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the gaps around the original supply tray, as your
fingers may get caught. Also, be careful not to drop objects, such as paper clips
into the gaps, as doing so may cause damage to the machine or cause it to
break down.
IMPORTANT
• When using the platen glass to copy or scan thick originals, such as books or magazines,
do not press down hard on the feeder.
• If the original output area is blocked, originals may get damaged, and printing may not be
performed correctly. Therefore, do not place any objects in the original output area.
Parts and Their Functions
1-13
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed to the platen glass for copying.
If you are using the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055, you can select to scan
originals as two-sided documents with or without being turned over. If you are using
the imageRUNNER 5050, the feeder automatically turns over two-sided originals to
make one or two-sided copies.
a Feeder Cover
e Original Output Area
Open this cover to remove jammed originals.
Originals that have been scanned from the
original supply tray are output into the Original
Output Area in the order that they are fed in the
feeder.
b Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed
sheet by sheet onto the platen glass. Place
originals into this tray with the surface that you
want to scan face up.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
f Original Set Indicator
Lights when originals are placed in the original
supply tray.
c Slide Guides
g Original Scanning Area Cleaning Tool
(for the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
only)
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the
original.
d Auxiliary Tray
Use this tool to clean the original scanning area
in the feeder. (See "Cleaning the Original
Scanning Area," on p. 7-60.)
Pull out the auxiliary tray if you are scanning
large size paper (11" x 17" or LGL).
Control Panel Parts and Functions
1a b
Energy
Saver
Reset
Help
ABC
2
3
JKL
MNO
4
5
7
d
Power
DEF
1
GHI
Additional Functions PQRS
c
Counter
Check
6
TUV WXYZ
8
Stop
9
Start
Display Contrast
0
Log In/ Clear
Out
Processing/Data
r
q po n
m l kj
a Energy Saver key
Press to set or cancel the Energy Saver mode.
b Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power
Supply)
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When
the control panel power switch is held for more
than three seconds, it initiates the Shutdown
mode. (See "Shutting Down the Machine," on p.
1-21.) When turned OFF, the machine is in the
Sleep mode.
c Edit Pen
Use when operating the touch panel display,
such as to enter characters. If you lose the edit
pen, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not use an object with a sharp end on the
control panel, such as a pencil or ballpoint pen,
in place of the edit pen.
d Clip Holder
Place paper clips here.
1-14
Parts and Their Functions
Error Main Power
i
h
g fe
e Counter Check key
Press to display the copy and print count totals
on the touch panel display.
f Stop key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan,
copy, or fax (scanning only) job.
g Start key
Press to start an operation.
h Main Power Indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
i Error Indicator
Flashes or lights if there is an error in the
machine. When the Error indicator flashes,
follow the instructions that appear on the touch
panel display. When the Error indicator
maintains a steady red light, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Flashes or blinks green when the machine is
performing operations, and maintains a steady
green light when fax data is stored in memory.
k Clear key
Press to clear entered values or characters.
l Numeric keys
Press to enter numerical values.
m ID (Log In/Out) key
Press when setting or enabling Department ID
Management.
o Additional Functions key
Press to specify additional functions.
p Help key
Press to display explanations and instructions of
modes or functions on the touch panel display.
q Reset key
Press to restore the standard settings of the
machine.
1
r Touch Panel Display
The settings screen for each function is shown
on this display.
n Display Contrast Dial
Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel
display.
Parts and Their Functions
1-15
Before You Start Using This Machine
j Processing/Data Indicator
Main Power and Control Panel Power
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a
control panel power switch, as well as a breaker that detects excess current or
leakage current.
How to Turn ON the Main Power
This section explains how to turn ON the main power.
1
Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the
power outlet.
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may
result in electrical shock.
2
Press the main power switch to the "I" side. The main power
switch is located on the right side of the machine.
( side)
( I side)
The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power switch
is turned ON.
IMPORTANT
If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main
power switch is ON, be sure to check the breaker to see if it is OFF. (See "When the
Power Does Not Turn ON," on p. 8-102.)
1-16
Main Power and Control Panel Power
The screens shown below are displayed while the system
software is loading.
● If login authentication by a login service (SDL (Simple Device Login)
or SSO (Single Sign-On)) is not set, and an application other than
MEAP is selected as the initial function in Common Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen):
❑ The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.
If a message is displayed on the touch panel display, proceed to step 4.
❑ The screen below is displayed when the machine is ready to scan.
The machine is ready to scan in approximately 30 seconds after the screen
above appears.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
3
1-17
NOTE
• Once the message <Reservation copies can be made.> appears on the touch
panel display, you can specify settings, and copying or printing begins
automatically as soon as the machine finishes warming up. (See Chapter 1,
"Introduction to the Copying Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
• In the case above, the standard settings are selected.
• The standard copy settings are:
- Copy Ratio: Direct (100%)
- Paper Selection: Auto Paper Selection
- Copy Exposure: Automatic Exposure Adjustment
- Copy Quantity: 1
- Copy Function: 1 1-sided copy
• The standard settings for each function of the machine (Copy, Mail Box, Send, and
Fax) are already set at the factory, but you can change them to suit your needs.
(See Chapter 8, "Customizing Settings," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide, and
Chapter 9, "Customizing Communications Settings," in the Sending and Facsimile
Guide.)
• You can select which functions to display on the Basic Features screen when
turning ON the main power, according to the Additional Functions settings. (See
"Initial Function at Power ON," on p. 4-26.)
• If you press [➞] on the Basic Features screen right after the machine is activated,
the screen will be blank. Wait for a moment, and then press [➞] again.
• If a Macintosh, which has been shut down, is connected to the machine via a USB
cable, when you turn the machine ON, the Macintosh may also turn ON. In this
case, disconnect the Macintosh from the machine. (You may also be able to solve
this problem by using a USB hub between the machine and the Macintosh).
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
● If login authentication by a login service (SDL or SSO) is not set, and
MEAP is selected as the initial function in Common Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen):
❑ The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.
1-18
Main Power and Control Panel Power
❑ After the Start Up screen disappears, the MEAP Start Up screen is displayed.
You can press [➞] to switch to the Basic Features screen to use the Copy, Mail
Box, etc. functions even if the MEAP Start Up screen is still displayed.
❑ The MEAP Application screen is displayed.
● If login authentication by a login service (SDL or SSO) is set:
❑ The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-19
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
❑ After the Start Up screen disappears, the MEAP Start Up screen is displayed
regardless of the Set as Initial Function settings.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
IMPORTANT
• If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main
power back ON. For instructions on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF
and then ON) the machine, see "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on p. 1-16.
• Do not turn the main power OFF, if you want to send or receive I-fax or fax
documents. Also, do not turn the main power OFF, if the optional Universal Send
Kit is activated, or the Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you want to be able to
send or receive fax documents. Sending or receiving I-fax or fax documents cannot
be done when the main power is turned OFF.
• If SSO or SDL is set as the login service, the machine will take longer to become
ready to scan.
4
If you are using a login service, log in using the procedure for
the login service you are using.
NOTE
• If you are using Department ID Management with the optional Card Reader-C1,
see "Procedure before Using the Machine," on p. 3-32.
• If you are using Department ID Management, see "Entering the Department ID and
Password," on p. 2-26.
• If you are using SDL or SSO, see "Using a Login Service," on p. 2-29.
1-20
Main Power and Control Panel Power
Control Panel Power Switch
Press the control panel power switch to cancel the Sleep mode and resume normal
machine operations.
NOTE
• The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer when it is in the
Sleep mode. I-fax and fax documents can also be received while the machine is in the
Sleep mode.
• It takes approximately 30 seconds for the machine to recover after the Sleep mode is
deactivated.
• If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to 'Low', it may take more than 10 seconds
for the touch panel display to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.
Shutting Down the Machine
If there are any jobs currently being processed, or a MEAP application is running
when the Shutdown mode is activated, the machine asks you to confirm and cancel
any existing jobs, and then access to the hard disk is restricted. This procedure
protects the hard disk from access errors the next time the machine is turned ON.
When the machine shuts down, it also performs an internal cooling down process,
which enables the machine to be shut down safely. Follow the instructions below to
safely shutdown the machine.
CAUTION
If you turn the main power of the machine OFF without following the procedure
below, copies output the next time the machine is turned ON may not be printed
correctly. In this case, printing will return to normal after a certain number of
copies are output.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-21
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
1
Press and hold the control panel power switch for more than
three seconds.
If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press the control panel power switch one
time to cancel the Sleep mode, and then press and hold the control panel power
switch again for more than three seconds.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
The job confirmation screen is displayed.
IMPORTANT
Do not initiate the Shutdown mode while fonts are being downloaded.
NOTE
• You can also force the machine into the Shutdown mode by pressing
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Shutdown Mode].
• You cannot force the machine into the Shutdown mode in the following cases:
- When the machine is receiving and updating device information
- When the machine is browsing device information
- When the machine is importing or exporting data using the Remote UI function
• In a rare instance, the machine may not go into the Shutdown mode even if you
press and hold the control panel power switch for more than three seconds. In this
case, follow the instructions on the touch panel display to turn OFF the main power.
• If print data is sent while the machine is in the Shutdown mode, the machine may
receive the data, depending on the print data's size. However, the print data is not
printed.
2
Confirm the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be
processed ➞ press [Start].
Jobs continue to be processed until [Start] is pressed.
To cancel the Shutdown mode, press [Cancel].
If there are no current jobs, proceed to step 4.
1-22
Main Power and Control Panel Power
3
Confirm the message displayed ➞ press [Yes].
If There Are Jobs Currently Being Processed or Waiting to Be Processed
If the Device Information Is Being Delivered
All of the jobs on the confirmation screen being processed or waiting to be
processed are canceled. The machine and any network communication
processes also start to shut down.
The Performing Shutdown screen appears.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
NOTE
• Jobs that are displayed on the job confirmation screen are:
- Current copy, fax, and print jobs (including secured print jobs)
- Copy and print jobs (including secured print jobs) that are waiting to be processed
• On the job confirmation screen, the current job is displayed on the first line, and the
other jobs are processed in the order in which they were reserved (up to seven
jobs).
1-23
4
When the following screen appears, wait for the machine to
complete the shutdown process.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
If you need to immediately operate the machine after starting the shutdown
process, press [Restart] ➞ [Yes].
If you press [Restart] when device information is being updated, a message
asking for your confirmation to continue appears on the screen. Press [Yes].
CAUTION
You can also force the shutdown of the machine (omitting the normal job
cancellation process) by pressing [Forced Off]. If you press [Forced Off]
while data is being processed, a message asking for your confirmation to
continue appears on the screen. Press [Yes]. However, as it is possible that
this will destroy data which is being processed or cause damage to the
machine, it is not recommended. Note that Canon will not be liable for any
damages resulting from the loss of data on the hard disk drive. For more
information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
1-24
Main Power and Control Panel Power
5
Confirm the contents of the shutdown screen ➞ turn the main
power switch of the machine to the " " side.
( side)
( I side)
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-25
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
NOTE
• It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down because of the
internal cooling down process.
• It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down depending on the
application you are using.
• The screen below is displayed when you press [Forced Off] in any of the following
cases.
- When the hardware is in finishing process
- When device information is being updated
IMPORTANT
The machine may continue to operate during or after the shutdown process. Do not
unplug the power cord until the device sounds stop.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
1-26
Main Power and Control Panel Power
System Settings
To set up the machine, refer to the following guides or sections for instructions:
■ Connecting the Machine to the Network
See the Network Quick Start Guide.
■ Setting Up the Network
See the Network Guide.
■ Installing the Printer Driver
See the PS Driver Guide, PCL Driver Guide, UFR II Driver Guide, Mac PS Driver Guide,
or Mac UFR II Driver Guide.
■ Using the Send Function
See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.
■ Using the Fax Function
See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.
■ Date and Time Settings
See "Current Date and Time," on p. 6-23.
■ System Manager Settings
See "Specifying the System Manager Settings," on p. 6-3.
System Settings
1-27
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
It is necessary to set up the machine before using it on a network, as a printer, or
with the Fax function.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
1-28
System Settings
Basic Operations
2
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the main features and basic operations of the machine.
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
The Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Adding New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Specifying Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Functions That Conserve Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Displaying a Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Reading Messages from the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Other Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Frequently Used Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Adjusting the Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Entering Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Values in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Using a Login Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Placing Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Document Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Multifunctional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2-1
What This Machine Can Do
All the elements you will ever need in a digital
multitasking machine.
2
Basic Operations
Copy
Send
Remote UI
Mail Box
Fax
The imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
incorporates a rich array of input and output features
that can greatly enhance your efficiency. Equipped
with features that meet the needs of document work
in a digitized office, the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/
5055/5050 represents the ultimate in digital
multitasking machines.
An asterisk (*) indicates functions which require
optional equipment. For information on the optional
equipment required to use each function, and the
available combinations of optional equipment, see
"Available Combination of Options," on p. 3-8.
Copying
1
2
3
4
7
2
1
5
8
4
In addition to normal copying functions,
convenient new functions, such as "Sample
Set," which helps to avoid copy errors,
"Booklet" for making copies into booklets,
and "Different Size Originals" for copying
originals of different sizes together in one
copy operation, are provided to increase
your productivity.
See the Copying and Mail Box Guide
6
3
1
8
6
3
5
6
7
8
Mail Box Function
The Mail Box function enables you to save
image or document data that has been
scanned from the scanner unit, or created
on a PC and sent to the machine's internal
hard disk. The saved data can be printed at
a specified time, or merged with separately
saved data, or data created on a PC for
simultaneous processing.
2-2
What This Machine Can Do
See the Copying and Mail Box Guide
Printing merged
documents
Scanning
various
originals
1
Sending
data from
computers
Sending Function*
The Send function enables you to send
scanned image or document data to file
servers, or send it by e-mail or I-fax. A
variety of file formats are supported (PDF
and TIFF), which offer you greater flexibility
in accommodating digital workplace
environments.
See the Sending and Facsimile Guide
Original
E-mail
File
I-Fax
Faxing*
In addition to normal facsimile functions,
the machine offers you Super G3
compatibility, which enables you to transmit
documents at high speeds, greatly reducing
transmission costs as compared to
conventional facsimile machines. In a
mobile environment, you can also receive
faxes remotely from the machine outside of
the office.
See the Sending and Facsimile Guide
Original
Fax
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board and Fax
Driver are installed, you can send facsimiles
from your computer.
What This Machine Can Do
2-3
Basic Operations
2
Printing*
You can upgrade this machine to a
high-speed network printer by activating the
optional UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit. This kit
incorporates UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering
II) Technology, which utilizes a newly
invented printing algorithm to minimize file
processing and achieve maximum
performance. It also supports PS and PCL
at maximized speed.
Basic Operations
2
See the PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Guide
1
Sending data
from computers
Printing
Alternatively, installing the optional
imagePASS (PS controller) enables you to
use the machine, not only as a PostScript
printer when loaded with Adobe PostScript
3 software, but also as an emulation printer
of PCL5e/PCL6.
imagePASS is an optional freestanding PS
(PostScript) controller. It can efficiently
output various data types, such as large
and complex files (which combine graphics,
photos, and text), Adobe PostScript 3 files,
detailed graphics, etc.
Using the Remote User Interface
You can control functions, such as
confirming the status of the machine, job
operations, and printing instructions for
data saved in inboxes, all from your PC's
Web browser.
2-4
What This Machine Can Do
See the Remote UI Guide
Web
Browser
The Network Scan function enables you to
use the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/
5050 as a conventional scanner. You can
scan a document using the machine, and
read the data in an application you are
using on your computer. To use this
function, the machine is required to be
connected to a network, and the Network
ScanGear software* installed at your
computer. You can scan images of up to 11"
x 17" in size at a resolution of 600 x 600 dpi.
See the Network ScanGear User's Guide
Original
Scanning
image data
Exporting data
to a computer
2
Basic Operations
Network Scanning
* The Network ScanGear software is supplied on
the accompanying CD-ROM. For more
information on the Network Scan function, see
the Network ScanGear User's Guide.
What This Machine Can Do
2-5
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/
5050
Most operations on this machine are executed from the touch panel display. By
pressing the keys according to the instructions on the touch panel display, you can
utilize almost all of the functions of this machine.
Basic Operations
2
CAUTION
Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers or the edit pen. Do
not press the touch panel display with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp
objects that can scratch the surface of the touch panel display or break it.
NOTE
Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.
The Touch Panel Display
Keys for using the machine's main functions are located on the top of the touch
panel display. To use any of the desired function's features, you must first press the
key for the desired function. The area on the bottom of the touch panel display is
used for messages that indicate the status of the machine.
Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel Display
After the power is turned ON, the following screen appears on the touch panel
display. You can press [Copy], [Send], [Mail Box], [Print Job], [Scan], or [System
Monitor] to change functions. (See "Initial Function at Power ON," on p. 4-26.)
To display other functions, such as an installed MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded
Application Platform) application, press [➞].
NOTE
• For information on the various keys displayed on the touch panel display, see "Various
Touch Panel Display Screens," on p. 2-8.
• You can set the initial screen (the first screen that appears when the machine is turned
ON) from the Additional Functions screen. The initial screen can be the Copy, Send or
Fax, Mail Box, Print Job, MEAP, or System Monitor screen.
2-6
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
■ Keys Displayed on the Touch Panel Display
The Copy Basic Features screen is shown as an example below.
b
a
c
d
f
e
Page 1 of the Basic Features Screen
(Group A)
g
h
i
Basic Operations
2
MEAP Application Screen
j
Page 2 of the Basic Features Screen
(Group B)
a Copy
e System Monitor
Press this key to access the machine's copying
functions. (See Chapter 1, "Introduction to the
Copying Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box
Guide.)
b Send
Press this key to access the machine's sending
functions, and facsimile functions. (See Chapter
1, "Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions,"
in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
c Mail Box
Press this key to access the machine's mailbox
functions. (See Chapter 2, "Introduction to the
Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail
Box Guide.)
d➞
Press this key to gain access to hidden function
keys. The function keys are displayed on two
screens. You can also customize the order of the
function keys in Function Display Settings in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See "Initial Function at Power ON," on
p. 4-26.)
Press this key to change, check, or cancel jobs,
and to check or print the job log. (See Chapter 5,
"Checking Job and Device Status.")
f Job/Print Status Display Area
The progress of jobs and copy operations, and
the status of devices and consumables are
displayed here. Also, depending on the login
service you are using, the current ID or user
name can be displayed here. (See "Displaying
the Current Department ID/User Name," on p.
6-56.)
g Print Job
Press this key to check or cancel print jobs, and
to check or print the print job log. (See Chapter
5, "Checking Job and Device Status.")
h Scan
Press this key to use the Network Scan function.
(See the Network ScanGear User's Guide.)
i Printer
Press this key to access the machine's printing
functions.
j Web Access
Press this key to view Web pages.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
2-7
Various Touch Panel Display Screens
The top of the touch panel display may differ according to the optional equipment
attached to the machine.
Attached Optional Equipment
None
2
Basic Operations
Universal Send Kit (activated)
Super G3 FAX Board
Universal Send Kit (activated) and Super G3
FAX Board
imagePASS, Universal Send Kit (activated),
Super G3 FAX Board, and Web Access
Software
2-8
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
Displayed Function Keys
Adding New Functions
This machine is compliant with MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded Application
Platform). MEAP is a software platform that enables the development of custom
applications based on Sun Microsystems' Java and Java 2 Platform Micro Edition
(J2ME) Technology.
MEAP enables you to do the following:
2
■ Install/Uninstall Customized Applications
Basic Operations
Installing MEAP applications enables you to utilize new customizable functions for the
machine. You can also uninstall these applications.
NOTE
For instructions on installing and uninstalling MEAP applications, see the MEAP SMS
Administrator Guide.
■ User Management and Restriction Using a Login Service
A login service manages data relating to users using the machine. The following three
login services are available:
• Default Authentication
Use the authentication method set on the machine, such as Department ID
Management or System Manager Settings, as the login service.
• SDL (Simple Device Login)
A login service that is linked to the Department ID Management function of this machine.
You can register user information from a Web browser, such as user and login names
corresponding to a specific Department ID. (See the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.)
• SSO (Single Sign-On)
A login service which can be used in an Active Directory environment or in the machine.
It contains the following user authentication systems. (See the MEAP SMS Administrator
Guide.)
- 'Domain Authentication'
- 'Local Device Authentication'
- 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'
IMPORTANT
To use the Domain Authentication system of SSO (including when performing domain
authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' system), a
Windows server in which Active Directory is installed and Security Agent are necessary.
Security Agent is supplied on the accompanying CD-ROM. For instructions on installing
Security Agent, see the Readme.pdf file on the CD-ROM.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
2-9
NOTE
Default Authentication is selected as the default login service. For instructions on
selecting and setting a login service other than default authentication, see the MEAP
SMS Administrator Guide.
Specifying Settings
The Additional Functions screen appears when you press (Additional Functions).
The Additional Functions screen enables you to make common settings related to
many functions of the machine, as well as customize specific functions to suit your
needs. For more information on the settings not explained in this manual, see the
following manuals:
Basic Operations
2
• Copy Settings:
The Copying and Mail Box Guide
• Communications Settings and
Address Book Settings:
The Sending and Facsimile Guide
• Mail Box Settings:
The Copying and Mail Box Guide
• Printer Settings:
The PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Guide
• Network Settings:
The Network Guide
The Additional Functions Screen
2-10
The System Functions Screen
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
Functions That Conserve Power
You can conserve power efficiently when the machine is not being used by using
the following modes.
IMPORTANT
Even if the main power switch is turned OFF, a small amount of energy is consumed if the
power plug is left inserted into the power outlet. If you do not want any energy consumed,
remove the power plug from the power outlet.
NOTE
• The touch panel display turns OFF when the machine enters one of the energy saving
modes.
• The machine can continue to receive I-fax or fax documents, and process or print data
sent from computers even if it is in one of the energy saving modes described below.
■ Energy Saver Mode
The Energy Saver mode conserves energy by lowering the temperature of the fixing unit
when the machine is not used for a prolonged period of time. You can set the machine to
enter the Energy Saver mode by pressing
(Energy Saver) on the control panel. To
reactivate the machine, press
(Energy Saver) again. You can also press the control
panel power switch to reactivate the machine.
NOTE
The Energy Saver mode's energy conservation level can be set to '-10%', '-25%', '-50%',
or 'None'. (See "Energy Saver Mode," on p. 4-36.)
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
2-11
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• Settings made from the Additional Functions screen are not changed even if you press
(Reset).
• For instructions on customizing settings, see Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings."
• For instructions on specifying System Settings, see Chapter 6, "System Manager
Settings."
• For instructions on specifying Printer Settings, see the PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Guide.
• For instructions on specifying Network Settings, see the Network Guide.
• [Communications Settings] and [Address Book Settings] are displayed on the Additional
Functions screen only if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional
Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
• [Communications Settings], [Forwarding Settings], [Restrict Access to Destinations], and
[Register LDAP Server] are displayed on the System Settings screen only if the optional
Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
■ Auto Sleep Mode
You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever you desire, by pressing the
control panel power switch. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power
switch again.
NOTE
• The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely depending on certain conditions.
(For more information, see "Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode," on p. 4-37.)
• Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using the machine for a prolonged
2
period of time, for example, at night.
Basic Operations
• If a Macintosh, which has been shut down, is connected to the machine via a USB cable,
when the machine returns from the Sleep mode, the Macintosh may turn ON. In this
case, disconnect the Macintosh from the machine. (You may also be able to solve this
problem by using a USB hub between the machine and the Macintosh).
• The time it takes for the machine to automatically enter the Sleep mode can be set from
10 seconds to 4 hours. The default setting is '15' minutes. (See "Auto Sleep Time," on p.
4-56.)
• If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to 'Low', it may takes more than 10 seconds
for the touch panel to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.
■ Quiet Mode
If the machine is not used (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time (after the last
print job or key operation is performed), the device sounds from the machine stop, and the
machine enters the Quiet mode.
NOTE
The time for the machine to enter the Quiet Mode can be set from 0 to 9 minutes in one
minute increments. (See "Time Until the Unit Quiets Down," on p. 4-57.)
■ Daily Timer
The machine automatically enters the Sleep mode at the specified time and day of the
week set with the daily timer. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power
switch.
NOTE
The Daily Timer settings can be set from Sunday to Saturday and 00:00 to 23:59. (See
"Daily Timer Settings," on p. 4-58.)
2-12
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Print Jobs
The System Monitor screen enables you to check the status of the machine, cancel
print jobs, or specify the printing priority.
The System Monitor Screen (Print)
Basic Operations
2
The System Monitor Screen
(Device)
On the Print Job screen, you can confirm, cancel, or change the priority of print
jobs.
The Print Job Screen
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
2-13
NOTE
• For instructions on checking the status of Copy, Fax, and Send jobs, see Chapter 5,
"Checking Job and Device Status," in this manual, and Chapter 8, "Checking/Changing
the Send/Receive Status," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.
• The meanings of the icons that appear in the Job/Print Status Display Area (on the
bottom left of the screen) are described below:
Icon (Type of Job)
Description
Copy Job
2
Basic Operations
Send/Fax Job
Mail Box Job
Printer Job
Report Job
Network Scan Job
Remote Copy Job
Additional Functions Job
Icon (Machine Status)
Description
Error
Paper Jam
Staple Jam
Replace Toner Cartridge
2-14
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
Displaying a Help Screen
Pressing (Help) brings up a guidance screen with information about the various
features that are available with your machine. Follow the instructions on the screen
to select the operation you want to perform. An explanation of the function and how
to set it is displayed.
■ Main Menu
(Help).
2
Basic Operations
This is the first screen displayed when you press
Press [Using the Help Function] to display an explanation of how to use the Help.
NOTE
Press (Help) after selecting a mode of the Copying, Sending, or Mail Box function to
bring up a guidance screen with an explanation of that mode.
■ List Screen
Displays a list of the functions selected on the main menu.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
2-15
■ Explanation Screen
Displays a detailed explanation of the function selected on the list screen.
Basic Operations
2
Press [Try It] to jump to the screen for setting the selected function.
Press [Display more detailed settings.] to display more detailed information and related
topics.
NOTE
The [Try It] key is only displayed on the Explanation Screen for some functions.
Example:
The procedure for making a copy of a photo.
1
Press [Making Copies] ➞ [Original Type Settings].
2
Check the detailed information for the function.
Press [Try It] ➞ [Yes] to try using the function.
2-16
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
Reading Messages from the System Manager
The System Manager uses the Message Board feature to convey messages to the
users of this machine. The messages are sent through the Remote User Interface
and displayed on the touch panel display. (See Chapter 3, "Customizing Settings,"
in the Remote UI Guide.)
Types of Message Boards
The following three types of message boards are available:
■ A Message Board without [Done]
■ A Message Board with [Done]
If you press [Done] and close the message board, you can perform normal operations.
The message appears again when the main power is turned OFF, and then turned back
ON again, or after the Auto Clear mode has initiated.
NOTE
The Auto Clear mode does not activate if Auto Clear Time is set to '0'.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
2-17
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• The message board can be used only if the machine is connected to a network.
• For instructions on erasing the message board, see "Clearing the Message Board," on p.
6-20.
■ A Message Board Where the Message Appears in the Job/Print Status
Display Area
Basic Operations
2
Job/Print Status Display Area
Other Useful Functions
Other useful functions are:
■ Auto Drawer Switching
If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates
another paper drawer loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from
that paper drawer.
NOTE
You can set whether a paper drawer is subject to automatic paper drawer switching for
each function. The default setting is 'Off' for the stack bypass, and 'On' for the other paper
drawers. (See "Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 4-31.)
■ Auto Clear
If the machine is not used for a period of approximately two minutes after the last print job
or key operation is performed, the machine automatically restores the standard settings.
NOTE
You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes in one minute increments. The
default setting is '2' minutes. (See "Auto Clear Time," on p. 4-57.)
2-18
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
■ Paper Supply Indicator
The paper supply indicator shows the remaining amount of paper in each paper drawer on
the Paper Select screen, and on the screen that appears when paper in a paper drawer
has run out during printing. (See Chapter 3, "Basic Copying and Mail Box Features," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Basic Operations
2
The Paper Select Screen
Paper Supply Indicator
Display When Paper Has Run Out
There are four different paper supply indicators, as shown below:
Display
Remaining Paper
Paper drawer is approximately 50% - 100% full.
Paper drawer is approximately 10% - 50% full.
Paper drawer is less than 10% full.
Paper drawer is empty.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
2-19
■ Auto Orientation
Using information, such as the size of the original and zoom ratio, the machine
automatically rotates the image to the most suitable orientation for the selected paper
size.
If the image does not fit onto the paper after it is rotated, the machine will not rotate the
image, and will print it as is, with part of the image cut off.
Even if Auto Orientation is set to 'On', the image is not rotated if the Different Size
Originals, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Staple (Double), XY Zoom, Shift, Image Repeat, or Tab
Paper Creation mode is set, or a nonstandard paper size is specified. (See Chapter 8,
"Customizing Settings," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Basic Operations
2
2-20
Overview of the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050
Using the Touch Panel Display
CAUTION
Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers or the edit pen. Do
not press the touch panel display with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp
objects that can scratch the surface of the touch panel display or break it.
NOTE
Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.
Frequently Used Keys
The following keys on the touch panel display are used frequently:
Press to cancel the mode that you are currently setting, or a mode
that has already been set, on screens other than the Additional
Functions screen. Also, press to close the current mode's setting
screen, and keep the original settings set from the Additional
Functions screen.
Press to confirm the current settings and proceed to the next step in
the procedure.
Press to go back to the previous step in the procedure, without
saving the current settings.
Press to close the current screen.
Press to confirm the current settings of a mode.
Using the Touch Panel Display
2-21
2
Basic Operations
This section describes the keys that are frequently used on the touch panel display.
Information on how to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display is also
provided.
Touch Panel Key Display
When you press a key on the touch panel display, that key is highlighted, and the
corresponding mode is set. When you set certain modes, the characters on some
keys may become grayed out. You cannot press keys that are grayed out. This
means that you cannot set these modes in combination with the presently set
mode.
■ Mode Setting Keys
2
Basic Operations
State of Keys
Description
The Shift mode is not set, and can be
selected.
The Shift mode is set, and can be selected.
(The key is highlighted)
(The characters on the key are grayed out.)
The Shift mode cannot be set in
combination with the presently set mode.
■ Keys That Indicate When a Mode Is Turned On or Off
Mode Is Turned Off
Mode Is Turned On
(Checked)
(Highlighted)
Keys that have a right triangle ( ) indicate that those keys have additional screens to set
their functions. If you press a key that does not have a right triangle ( ), it turns that mode
on or off.
Keys That Display Additional Settings
Keys That Turn Modes On/Off
Keys that have a colored triangle ( ) in the lower right corner and that appear on screens
for storing settings, are keys that already have settings stored in them.
Settings Are Stored
2-22
Using the Touch Panel Display
No Settings Are Stored
■ Keys That Display a Drop-Down List
Pressing a key that has a down triangle (▼) to the right of the name of the selection,
displays a drop-down list containing other setting options.
Before Selection
Drop-Down List
After Selection
■ Numeric Keys
Any time the numeric keys icon is displayed on the screen, you can use the numeric keys
on the control panel to enter values.
You can enter values using the numeric keys on the
touch panel display or on the control panel.
You can only enter values using the numeric keys on
the control panel.
Adjusting the Brightness
If the touch panel display is difficult to view, use the display contrast dial on the
control panel to adjust its brightness.
Display Contrast
Lighter
Darker
NOTE
To make the touch panel display brighter, turn the dial counterclockwise. To make it
darker, turn the dial clockwise.
Using the Touch Panel Display
2-23
Basic Operations
2
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
For screens that require alphanumeric entries, enter characters using the keys
displayed on the touch panel display, as shown below.
Basic Operations
2
NOTE
• When entering characters on the SDL or SSO authentication screen or in MEAP
application functions, the screen you actually see may be different.
• The available entry modes, and the maximum number of characters that you can enter
vary, depending on the type of entries you are making.
Entering Characters
1
Press the entry mode drop-down list ➞ select the entry mode
➞ enter characters.
Entry Mode
The procedure for entering characters with the entry mode is as follows.
Entry Mode
Example
Procedure
Alphanum.
Canon
Enter 'Canon'.
Symbol
é
Press [é].
To enter uppercase letters, press [Shift].
To enter a space, press [Space].
To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ].
To switch the entry mode, press the entry mode drop-down list ➞ select the entry
mode ➞ enter the desired characters or symbols.
2-24
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering characters, press [ ] or [ ] to position the
cursor ➞ press [Backspace] to delete the characters ➞ enter the correct
characters.
• To delete all of the characters you have entered, press
(Clear).
When you have entered all characters, press [OK].
2
Values in Inches
If you want to enter values in inches in all modes which require a numeric entry, set
Inch Entry to 'On' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See
"Inch Entry," on p. 4-31.) This enables you to enter values in inches when you press
[Inch] on a screen requiring a numeric entry or measurement.
The following example shows you how to enter 1 1/2" for Original Size in the Zoom
Program mode.
1
Press [1] ➞ [_] ➞ [1] ➞ [/] ➞ [2] using the numeric keys on the
touch panel display.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering values, press [C] on the touch panel display
➞ enter the correct values.
• You can enter only 2, 4, 8, or 16 as the denominator.
• The value entered in inches is converted to millimeters by the machine each time it
is entered. Thus, there may be a slight difference between the value calculated and
the actual value entered.
• To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display
2-25
Basic Operations
2
Entering the Department ID and Password
If Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and password
must be entered before using this machine.
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• For instructions on setting the Department ID and password, see "Department ID
Management," on p. 6-5.
• If you are using a control card for Department ID management, the message <You must
insert a control card.> appears on the touch panel display. Insert the control card into the
card slot. (See "Card Reader-C1," on p. 3-31.)
• The use of some functions may be restricted, and a screen asking you to enter your
Department ID and password or insert your control card may appear while you are using
the machine. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display to continue using the
selected function.
• If you are using a MEAP application to manage user authentication, and SDL or SSO is
set as the login service, the following procedure is not necessary. (See "Using a Login
Service," on p. 2-29.)
1
Use
(numeric keys) to enter your Department ID and
password.
❑ Press [Dept. ID] ➞ enter your Department ID.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password.
If no password has been set, proceed to step 2.
The numbers that you enter for the password are displayed as asterisks
(*******).
2-26
Entering the Department ID and Password
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the Department ID or password, press
(Clear) ➞ enter the correct values.
Press
(Log In/Out).
Additional Functions PQRS
7
TUV
WXYZ
8
9
Star
2
0
Display Contrast
Log In/ Clear
Out
Processing/Data
The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel
display.
NOTE
If the Department ID or password that you entered is incorrect, the message <This
number has not been stored. Enter the number again.> appears. Repeat this
procedure from step 1.
Entering the Department ID and Password
2-27
Basic Operations
2
3
When your operations are complete, press
the control panel.
(Log In/Out) on
If you are using a control card, remove the control card, and take it with you. (See
"Card Reader-C1," on p. 3-31.)
Additional Functions PQRS
7
TUV
WXYZ
8
9
Star
0
2
Basic Operations
Display Contrast
Log In/ Clear
Out
Processing/Data
NOTE
• To perform operations again, you have to re-enter your Department ID and
password.
• If you do not press
(Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine,
any subsequent copies made are added to the total of the Department ID you
previously entered.
• Even if you forget to press
(Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the
machine, the screen for entering the Department ID and password automatically
appears after the set Auto Clear Time elapses. (See "Auto Clear Time," on p. 4-57.)
• After pressing
(Log In/Out), all settings are canceled, and the machine returns to
the Standard mode.
2-28
Entering the Department ID and Password
Using a Login Service
NOTE
• SDL and SSO are used as examples to explain the procedure. However, if you are using
a different login service, the login procedure may vary.
• For instructions on selecting and setting a login service, see the MEAP SMS
Administrator Guide.
• For instructions on registering user data for SDL and Local Device Authentication user
authentication system of SSO, see the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.
• For information on the user name used for the Domain Authentication user authentication
system of SSO (including when performing Domain Authentication with 'Domain
Authentication + Local Device Authentication' user authentication system), contact your
system administrator.
1
Press [User Name].
If SDL is set as login service, a screen similar to the following is displayed.
Using a Login Service
2-29
2
Basic Operations
If you are managing the machine with a login service, such as SDL (Simple Device
Login) or SSO (Single Sign-On), enter the user name and password before using
this machine.
If SSO is set as a login service, the login destination is also displayed.
Basic Operations
2
IMPORTANT
• To use the Domain Authentication system of SSO (including when performing
domain authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device
Authentication' system), a Windows server in which Active Directory is installed
and Security Agent are necessary.
• If there is more than a 30 minute time difference between the current time set in the
computer's registry using Windows Active Directory and the time set on the
machine, an error will occur if you log on using the Domain Authentication system
of SSO (including when performing domain authentication with the 'Domain
Authentication + Local Device Authentication' system). To be able to log on using
SSO, the current time on both the computer and the machine must match. For
instructions on setting the current date and time on the machine, see "Current Date
and Time," on p. 6-23.
NOTE
• You can also specify the number of user's logs displayed on the touch panel display
when logging in. (For more information, see the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.)
• When using SDL, you can use only alphanumeric characters for user names and
passwords.
• When using the Domain Authentication system of SSO (including when performing
domain authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device
Authentication' system), you can use only alphanumeric characters, . (period), (hyphen), _ (underscore), or % (percent) for a user name. You can log in only if you
use valid characters.
• When using the Local Device system of SSO (including when performing local
device authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device
Authentication' system), you can set only alphanumeric characters for user names
and passwords.
2-30
Using a Login Service
2
Enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
3
Basic Operations
2
Press [Password].
The SDL Login Screen
4
Enter the password ➞ press [OK].
Using a Login Service
2-31
NOTE
If you are using the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO
(including the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' user
authentication system), select the Login destination from the drop-down list. For
instructions on selecting the Login destination, see the MEAP SMS Administrator
Guide.
5
2
Press [Log In].
Basic Operations
You can also press
(Log In/Out) instead of [Log In] to log on.
The Basic Features screen of the selected function (or the MEAP application
screen) appears on the touch panel display.
If the user name or password that you entered is incorrect, a message appears
prompting you to verify your user name and password. Repeat the procedure
from step 1.
6
When your operations are complete, press
the control panel.
Additional Functions PQRS
7
TUV
WXYZ
8
9
(Log In/Out) on
Star
0
Display Contrast
Log In/ Clear
Out
Processing/Data
The screen for entering the user name and password appears.
2-32
Using a Login Service
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• To perform operations again, you have to re-enter your user name and password.
• If you do not press
(Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine,
any subsequent copies made are added to the total of the user who previously
logged on to the machine.
• Even if you forget to press
(Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the
machine, the screen for entering the user name and password automatically
appears after the set Auto Clear Time elapses. (See "Auto Clear Time," on p. 4-57.)
• After pressing
(Log In/Out), all settings are canceled, and the machine returns to
the Standard mode.
Using a Login Service
2-33
Placing Originals
Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size
and type of the original, and the copy modes that you want to use.
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, use the Job Build
mode on the Special Features screen. (See Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box
Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide or Chapter 4, "Special Scanning Features,"
in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
■ Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and
magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies.
■ Feeder
Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same
time, and press
(Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the platen
glass and scans them. If you are using the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055, you can
select to scan originals as two-sided documents with or without being turned over. If you
are using the imageRUNNER 5050, the feeder automatically turns over two-sided
originals to make one or two-sided copies.
Document Sizes
The size of the original is automatically detected, and the document is scanned.
When you are sending fax documents, if the output paper in the recipient's machine
is not equal to the scanned document size, the original image may be either
reduced in size or divided into smaller parts before it is sent.
The machine cannot always detect the size of the original if it is a nonstandard
paper size, such as a book. In this case, specify the size at which you want to scan
the original. (See Chapter 3, "Basic Scanning Features," in the Sending and
Facsimile Guide.)
2-34
Placing Originals
Orientation
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge
of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left
corner) or the back edge of the feeder.
Platen Glass
Basic Operations
2
Place the original
face down.
Place the original
face down.
Vertical Placement
Horizontal Placement
Feeder
Place the
original face up.
Vertical Placement
Place the
original face up.
Horizontal Placement
NOTE
• If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the
arrow in the top left corner), your original may not be scanned correctly, depending on the
copy mode that you have set.
• LTR and STMT originals can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the
scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than vertically
placed originals. Place originals horizontally when scanning with a Preset Zoom, such as
when enlarging an LTR original onto 11" x 17" paper.
• Horizontally placed LTR and STMT originals are referred to as LTRR and STMTR.
• 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally.
Placing Originals
2-35
Platen Glass
You should use the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and
magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies. You should also
place originals onto the platen glass when you want to copy an 11" x 17" original
with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the
original being cut off. (See Chapter 1, "Introduction to the Copying Functions," or
Chapter 3, "Basic Copying Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide, or
Chapter 3, "Basic Scanning Features," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
Basic Operations
2
NOTE
The machine automatically detects the size of the following originals: 11" x 17", LGL,
LTR, and STMTR.
1
Lift the feeder.
Sensor
IMPORTANT
This machine is equipped with an open/close sensor on the feeder (see circled
area in the above illustration). When placing originals on the platen glass, lift the
feeder approximately 11 7/8" (300 mm) so that the sensor detaches from the
feeder. If the sensor does not detach from the feeder, the size of the originals may
not be detected correctly.
2-36
Placing Originals
2
Place your originals face down.
The surface of the original that you want to copy must be placed face down.
Align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the
arrow in the top left corner).
Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way.
NOTE
When you are enlarging an LTR or STMT original onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper,
place the original horizontally on the platen glass, and align it with the LTRR or
STMTR marks.
3
Gently close the feeder.
Placing Originals
2-37
Basic Operations
2
CAUTION
• Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in
personal injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder when using the platen glass to make
copies of thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in
personal injury.
• Beware that the light emitted from the platen glass may be very bright
when closing the feeder.
2
Basic Operations
IMPORTANT
If you are placing an original on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected
after the feeder is closed. Be sure to close the feeder before copying.
NOTE
• Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.
• The size of LTRR and STMT originals cannot be detected. After pressing
(Start),
follow the instructions on the screen to specify the original size.
• You can designate the way the machine handles LTRR or STMT originals that are
placed on the platen glass. (See "Distinguishing LTRR and STMT Originals," on p.
4-38.)
2-38
Placing Originals
Feeder
Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the
same time, and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to
the platen glass and scans them. If you are using the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/
5055, you can select to scan originals as two-sided documents with or without
being turned over. If you are using the imageRUNNER 5050, the feeder
automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one or two-sided copies.
g/m2)
- One-sided scanning: 11 to 32 lb bond (42 to 128
- Two-sided scanning: 13 to 32 lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
• Size: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR
• Tray Capacity: up to 100 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
IMPORTANT
• Thin originals may become creased, if used in a high temperature or high humidity
environment.
• Do not place the following types of originals into the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon backed paper or other originals which may not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
- Originals with a special shape, such as tab paper
• If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become
creased, and make feeding impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times
(this number varies, depending on the type and quality of the original).
• If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder
cleaning procedure. (See "Routine Cleaning," on p. 7-50.)
• Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the feeder.
1
Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals.
Placing Originals
2-39
Basic Operations
2
• Weight:
2
Neatly place your originals with the side to be copied face up
into the original supply tray.
Place your originals as far into the feeder as they will go, until the Original Set
indicator is lit.
2
Basic Operations
Original Set Indicator
If any dirt on the original scanning area is detected when the originals are placed
in the feeder, a screen prompting you to clean the original scanning area
appears. Even though streaks may appear on the copies, you can continue to
scan your documents by pressing [Done].
It is recommended, however, that you open the feeder, clean the scanning area,
and then close the feeder. The following screen will not appear once the
scanning area is clean.
For instructions on cleaning the original scanning area, see Chapter 7, "Routine
Maintenance."
If the original scanning area in the feeder is dirty, press [Display Procedure] on
the screen to check the cleaning procedure, then clean the original scanning
area. (See "Cleaning the Original Scanning Area," on p. 7-60.)
2-40
Placing Originals
IMPORTANT
• Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
• When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output area to
avoid paper jams.
Original Output Area
NOTE
• When you are enlarging an LTR or STMT original onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper,
place the original horizontally.
• The scanned originals are output to the original output area in the order they are
fed into the feeder.
• You can place different size originals together into the feeder if you set the Different
Size Originals mode. (See Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box Features," in
the Copying and Mail Box Guide, and Chapter 4, "Special Scanning Features," in
the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
Placing Originals
2-41
Basic Operations
2
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
If you are making prints on tracing paper, labels, tab paper, transparencies, or
nonstandard paper size stock, load the paper stock into the stack bypass.
2
Basic Operations
IMPORTANT
• Note the following points when using the stack bypass:
- Paper Quantity: one to approximately 50 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2), stack
approximately 1/4" (5 mm) high)
- Paper Size: 3 7/8" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17" (99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)
- Paper Weight: 17 lb bond to 110 lb index (64 to 200 g/m2)
- Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow
the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass (allowable curl amount: less than
3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavy paper). There are some
types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be fed into
the stack bypass.
• Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.
• Feed tracing paper one sheet at a time, and remove each sheet as it is delivered to the
output tray. Loading several sheets of tracing paper together may cause paper jams.
• Depending on the type of heavy paper you want to load, if you load multiple sheets of
heavy paper into the stack bypass, a paper jam may occur. In this case, load only one
sheet of heavy paper at a time.
• If you are making two-sided prints, select the 2-Sided mode. The printed paper may
crease depending on the moisture absorption condition of the paper, and if you copy the
two pages as two one-sided documents.
• To print on the back side of preprinted paper, load the paper into the stack bypass, and
press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page] on the paper selection screen that appears.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
• If you select [Free Size] for copying, you cannot use the Auto, Entire Image, Finishing,
1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion,
Image Combination, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Repeat, Tab Paper
Creation, Form Composition, Secure Watermark, Pg/Copy Set Numbering, Watermark/
Print Date, Job Block Combination, or Store In User Inbox mode. (See Chapter 1,
"Introduction to Copying," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
• If you select [Free Size] for printing documents stored in an inbox, you cannot use the
Finishing, 2-Sided Printing, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separator, Booklet, Shift,
Form Composition, Secure Watermark, Pg/Copy Set Numbering, Watermark/Print Date,
or Tab Paper Creation mode. (See Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Function," in
the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
2-42
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
NOTE
• When scanning the following originals, you cannot use the Automatic Paper Selection
mode. Use the Manual Paper Selection mode when scanning these types of originals:
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
■ Standard Size
You can select standard inch paper, or A or B series paper.
2
Basic Operations
■ Free Size
You can load nonstandard paper sizes (3 7/8" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17"
(99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)).
1
Open the stack bypass.
NOTE
If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass is different from the
paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, set Stack Bypass Standard
Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See
"Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass," on p. 4-46.)
● If the paper you want to specify is already loaded in the stack
bypass:
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ [Stack Bypass] ➞ select the paper size and type loaded
in the stack bypass ➞ proceed to step 6.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-43
● If the paper loaded in the stack bypass is not the paper that you
want to specify:
❑ Check to see if any job is reserved. (See "Checking Job Status," on p. 5-4.)
If there is a current or reserved job, you can reserve a change of paper for the
stack bypass. (See Chapter 1, "Introduction to the Copying Functions," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
If there is no reserved job, remove any paper remaining in the stack bypass ➞
continue the procedure from step 2.
2
Basic Operations
2
Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.
Slide Guide
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray.
Auxiliary Tray
2-44
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
Load the paper into the stack bypass.
2
Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit
mark ( ).
When you use the stack bypass to make copies, straighten out curled papers
prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.
Feeding Direction
To print on the back side of preprinted paper, load the blank side of the
preprinted paper face up into the stack bypass, as shown in the illustration
below.
Output
Direction
After the first one-sided
copy is made
Feeding
Direction
When copying on the back
side of a preprinted sheet.
IMPORTANT
When loading paper into the stack bypass, align the paper stack neatly between
the slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-45
Basic Operations
3
NOTE
• If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to
load, follow those instructions.
• When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass, the side facing up is the one
printed on.
• If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper
stack over and reload it.
• For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has
logos or patterns already printed on it), see "Relationship between Original
Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart," on p. 9-11.
Basic Operations
2
4
Select the desired paper size.
● If you want to select a standard paper size:
❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
● If you want to select an nonstandard paper size:
❑ Press [Free Size] ➞ [Next].
2-46
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] ➞ adjust the width of the slide
guides ➞ specify the desired paper size.
If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to
match the paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, or set Stack
Bypass Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See "Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass," on p. 4-46.)
IMPORTANT
Set the paper size to the same size as the paper loaded in the Stack Bypass.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-47
Basic Operations
2
5
Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
Basic Operations
2
If you are using a paper type that is not listed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type ➞ press [OK].
If you are printing on the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side
of 2-Sided Page].
NOTE
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [LTR] or [LTRR] is selected as the paper
size.
• For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-52.
• You can register a paper type that is not listed in [Detailed Settings] in the Stack
Bypass Settings: Selecting the Paper Type screen. For details on registering paper
types, see "Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types," on p. 6-67.
2-48
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
6
Press [Done].
Paper Size/Type Selected
Paper Size/Type
Currently Loaded
If you press [Stack Bypass Settings], follow the procedures and screens in step 4
to reset the paper size and type settings.
NOTE
Press
7
to display the detailed information of the selected paper.
If the Copy function is selected, place your originals ➞ select
the desired copy settings.
If you are printing documents that are stored in an inbox, this step is not
necessary.
8
Press
(Start).
If you are printing documents that are stored in an inbox, press [Start Print].
Scanning starts.
NOTE
To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-49
Basic Operations
2
Multifunctional Operations
The imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050 offers the user many functions, such as
printing, scanning, copying, and sending, which can be used together. The
following table provides you with the details of multifunctional operations.
2
Basic Operations
: Available
: Unavailable
: Available, but with conditions
Receive
via
via
NetFax
work
Receive
Send
Print
Data
via
Network
Scan
via
Fax
Print
Copy/
Mail Send Copy
Box
RX
Document
Print
Data
Copy:
Scan
and
Print
via
Network
via Fax
Print Data
Send
*3
*3
*3
*3
*1*3
*1*3
*1*3
*1
*1
*1
*1*3
*1*3
*1*3
*2
*2
*2*3
via
Network
via Fax
Scan
*3
*3
*1
Copy/
Mail Box
Send
*3
Copy
Print
RX
Document
Print Data
*4
*3
*3
Copy:
Scan and Print
*4
*1*3
*1
*1*3
*2
*2*3
*1*3
*1
*1*3
*2
*2*3
*1
*2
*1
*2
*2
*2
*1 The machine's performance may be affected if image processing, such as compression, enlargement/reduction, and
rotation are carried out.
*2 The output order of competing jobs varies, depending on whether an optional finisher is attached.
- When an optional finisher is attached: one set is output alternately for each job
- When an optional finisher is not attached: one page is output alternately for each job
*3 The machine's processing speed may be slower.
*4 When a PDF (OCR) file or I-fax is being sent, memory conflicts may arise if a received print job or image data
processing job is executed. The performance of all operations affected by this memory conflict may decrease,
depending on the amount of available memory.
2-50
Multifunctional Operations
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• Even if it is possible to perform multifunctional operations, the operation performance
may decrease.
• The machine's performance may be affected if several network send and receive jobs are
being carried out at the same time.
• The operation of printing data from an inbox is included in "Print Data" under "Print" in the
table.
• The operation of printing remote copy jobs or cascade copy jobs is included in "Copy"
under "Print" in the table.
Multifunctional Operations
2-51
Available Paper Stock
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following
table. Icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper drawer can be
displayed on the paper selection screen if you store that information in the machine
beforehand. (See "Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source," on p. 4-33.)
Basic Operations
2
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Source
Paper Type
Paper Drawer
1 and 2
(17 lb bond to
110 lb index
(64 to 200
g/m2))
Paper Drawer
3 and 4
(17 lb bond to
110 lb index
(64 to
200 g/m2))
Plain*1
Recycled*2
Color
Pre-punched
Bond
Letterhead
Heavy *3
Transparency*4
Tracing Paper*5
Labels
Tab Paper*6
*1 Plain paper is from 17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2).
*2 Recycled paper is from 17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2).
*3 Heavy paper is from 24 lb bond to 110 lb index (91 to 200 g/m2).
*4 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.
*5 Some types of tracing paper cannot be used.
*6 Use the Tab Feeding Attachment when loading tab paper.
2-52
Available Paper Stock
Stack Bypass
(17 lb bond to
110 lb index
(64 to
200 g/m2))
Paper Deck
(optional)
(17 lb bond to
110 lb index
(64 to
200 g/m2))
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Source
Paper
Drawer
3 and 4
Paper
Deck
(optional)
Width x Length
11" x 17"
11" x 17"
*1
LGL
8 1/2" x 14"
*1
LTR
8 1/2" x 11"
LTRR
11" x 8 1/2"
STMTR
5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
EXEC
7 1/4" x 10 1/2"
Free Size
3 7/8" x 5 7/8" to
11 5/8" x 17"
(99 mm x 148 mm to
297 mm x 432 mm)
Stack
Bypass
2
Basic Operations
Paper
Drawer
1 and 2
Paper Size
*1
*1 Available only if the optional Paper Deck-AE1 is attached to the machine.
NOTE
• For instructions on loading paper, see the following sections:
- Paper Drawers: "Loading Paper," on p. 7-2
- Paper Deck: "Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)," on p. 7-20
- Stack Bypass: "Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass," on p. 2-42
• The Paper Deck-AD1 and Paper Deck-AE1 are optional.
Available Paper Stock
2-53
Basic Operations
2
2-54
Available Paper Stock
Optional Equipment
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the uses of optional equipment, and their special functions.
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Sample System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Available Combination of Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Finishing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Copy Tray-L1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Procedure before Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Procedure after Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
3-1
System Configuration
This section provides you with illustrations of all the optional equipment that can be
attached to the machine, and shows you examples of different system
configurations.
Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
3
b
a
c
d
i
h
g
f
e
3-2
System Configuration
The Copy Tray-L1 is equipped with the following
features: Collate, Group, and Rotate.
b Card Reader-C1
The Card Reader-C1 enables Department ID
Management to be performed with the control
cards.
c Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1
The Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 provides
an additional source of paper for printing jobs.
The Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 holds up
to 3,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
d Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/
Document Insertion Unit-E1
If the Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or
Document Insertion Unit-E1 is attached to an
optional finisher, you can insert covers into
documents. If the Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1 is attached, you can also perform
C-folding and Z-folding.
e Puncher Unit-AT1
The Puncher Unit-AT1 is equipped with the Hole
Punch mode. The Puncher Unit-AT1 can be
attached only if the optional Finisher-AD1 or
Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached.
f Staple Cartridge-D2
The Staple Cartridge-D2 can be attached to the
optional Saddle Finisher-AD2 for saddle
stitching.
g Staple-J1
The Staple-J1 can be attached to the optional
finisher for stapling (Corner and Double).
h Saddle Finisher-AD2
3
The Saddle Finisher-AD2 is equipped with the
following features: Collate, Group, Offset, and
Staple (Corner, Double, and Saddle Stitch).
i Finisher-AD1
The Finisher-AD1 is equipped with the following
features: Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple
(Corner and Double).
NOTE
• Only one optional finisher can be attached to the main unit at a time.
• The Copy Tray-L1 can be attached to the machine only if no optional finisher is attached.
System Configuration
3-3
Optional Equipment
a Copy Tray-L1
Sample System Configurations
Different optional equipment can be attached to the machine to form various
system configurations. The illustrations below are only examples of some of the
possible system configurations. For information on the complete range of optional
equipment configurations, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
The optional Copy Tray-L1 is attached.
Optional Equipment
3
The optional Saddle Finisher-AD2, Document
Insertion/Folding Unit-F1, Puncher Unit-AT1,
and Paper Deck-AE1 are attached.
3-4
System Configuration
System Options
By installing system related optional accessories, the user can expand the
functionality of the machine. This section describes the system related optional
accessories and their functions.
■ UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit
The UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit supports PCL and PS (PostScript) emulation printing
solutions, and incorporates Canon's original UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering II) Technology.
It also enables you to print TIFF, JPEG, PDF, and PS files directly from your PC using the
Remote UI.
imagePASS is a freestanding printer controller which supports Adobe Genuine PostScript
3 and PCL5e/PCL6, and is suited for office environments in which larger print volumes are
frequently processed. It is also suited for users who use Adobe PostScript or other
PostScript applications.
NOTE
imagePASS cannot be used with the optional UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit.
■ Super G3 FAX Board
Installing the Super G3 FAX Board enables you to send and receive fax documents. You
can also send documents that have been created in applications directly from your PC via
a network.
NOTE
The Canon Fax Driver is supplied with the Super G3 FAX Board, and enables you to
send fax images from a PC via the machine.
■ Universal Send Kit
The Universal Send Kit enables you to send scanned documents via e-mail or I-fax, as
well as send scanned data to be stored in file servers or User Inboxes.
NOTE
To enable the Send function, the optional Universal Send Kit must be activated.
■ Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set
The Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set improves the performance of PDF files
created on the machine. It enables you to encrypt the PDF files and set a password to
send them safely to a file server or e-mail address. It also enables the recipient of a PDF
file sent to an e-mail or file server destination to verify which device scanned it.
System Configuration
3-5
Optional Equipment
3
■ imagePASS
NOTE
To use the features of the Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set, it must be activated
by registering a license key after the optional Universal Send Kit has been activated.
■ Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit
The Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit enables you to process OCR (Optical Character
Recognition) to the scanned documents when making a PDF file. These files can then be
easily searched using the text embedded in the PDF file. This is called the Searchable
PDF mode.
NOTE
The Searchable PDF mode is available only if the Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit is
activated after the optional Universal Send Kit has been activated.
Optional Equipment
3
■ Digital User Signature PDF Kit
The Digital User Signature PDF Kit improves the performance of PDF files created on the
machine. It enables the recipient of a PDF file sent to an e-mail or file server destination to
verify which user signed it.
NOTE
To use the features of the Digital User Signature PDF Kit, it must be activated by
registering a license key after the optional Universal Send Kit has been activated. A
separate contract with a certificate authority is also necessary.
■ Secure Watermark
The Secure Watermark enables you to embed hidden text in the background of copies.
You can embed text, such as "CONFIDENTIAL," the date and time, or a department
name. The embedded text only appears when the machine prints the copies.
NOTE
To use the features of the Secure Watermark, it must be activated by registering a license
key.
■ HDD Data Encryption Kit
The HDD Data Encryption Kit is a tool that enables you to prevent data leakages by
encrypting all of the data stored in the hard disk of the machine. Encrypted hard disk data
that is extracted from the machine cannot be read properly.
■ HDD Data Erase Kit
The HDD Data Erase Kit enables you to erase the data stored on the hard disk
completely.
3-6
System Configuration
NOTE
To use the features of the HDD Data Erase Kit, it must be activated by registering a
license key.
■ Web Access Software
The Web Access Software enables the user to view web pages from the touch panel
display of the machine.
NOTE
To print web pages and PDF files using the Web Access Software, the optional UFR II/
PCL/PS Printer Kit must be activated by registering a license key.
The Encrypted Secure Print Software enables you to encrypt print data sent from a
computer using the Secured Print function, and decrypt it at the machine. This enables
you to strengthen the security of print data by preventing the contents of your printed
documents from being seen by other users, and preventing the unauthorized use of
confidential information.
NOTE
To use the features of the Encrypted Secure Print Software, it must be activated after the
UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit has been activated.
■ Access Management System Kit (Soon to be Released)
The Access Management System Kit enables you to restrict the various features of the
Copy, Print, Mail Box, and Send functions that each user can use. Restricting the Send
function enables you to reduce the risk of confidential information being leaked, and
restricting users to only allow two-sided printing of multiple page documents enables
printing costs to be reduced.
■ WorkFlow Composer
Workflow Composer is an option that enables you to register combinations of functions
(such as Scan, Print, and Send functions). For example, you can execute multiple
operations such as scanning and then sending an original, or combining documents
stored in a User Inbox and then printing them as a booklet, all with a single operation.
The authentication function of Workflow Composer also enables each user to register and
execute their own settings.
System Configuration
3-7
Optional Equipment
3
■ Encrypted Secure Print Software
Available Combination of Options
This table describes the optional equipment that is needed to use each function,
the available combination of options that can be installed simultaneously, and the
limitations when installing optional equipment.
Machine
Function
Optional
Equipment Needed
Simultaneous Installation
Required
Limitations
-
To use the Send
function, the Universal
Send Kit must be
activated.
Universal Send Kit
To use the features of
the Universal Send
Searchable PDF Kit, it
must be activated
after the optional
Universal Send Kit
has been activated.
Universal Send Kit
To use the features of
the Universal Send
PDF Security Feature
Set, it must be
activated after the
optional Universal
Send Kit has been
activated.
Digital User
Signature PDF Kit
Universal Send Kit
To use the features of
the Digital User
Signature PDF Kit, it
must be activated
after the optional
Universal Send Kit
has been activated.
Fax Function
Super G3
FAX Board
-
-
Secure Watermark
Secure Watermark
(activated)
-
To use the features of
the Secure
Watermark, it must be
activated.
PDL Print Function
UFR II/PCL/PS
Printer Kit or
imagePASS
-
The UFR II/PCL/PS
Printer Kit and
imagePASS cannot
be installed together.
Universal Send Kit
(activated)
Optional Equipment
3
Universal Send
Searchable PDF Kit
Send Function
Universal Send PDF
Security Feature Set
3-8
System Configuration
Machine
Function
Optional
Equipment Needed
Simultaneous Installation
Required
Limitations
-
The Copy Tray-L1
cannot be used with
the Finisher-AD1 or
Saddle Finisher-AD2.
Additional Copy Tray
Copy Tray-L1
Collate
Group
Offset
Staple
Finisher-AD1 or
Saddle Finisher-AD2
-
The Copy Tray-L1
cannot be used with
the Finisher-AD1 or
Saddle Finisher-AD2.
Hole Punch
Puncher Unit-AT1
Finisher-AD1 or
Saddle Finisher-AD2
-
Document Insertion/
Finisher-AD1 or
Folding Unit-F1
Saddle Finisher-AD2
-
Department ID
Management*1
Card Reader-C1
-
-
Large Scale Paper
Supply
Paper Deck-AD1 or
Paper Deck-AE1
-
-
Security Management
(Data Encryption)
HDD Data
Encryption Kit
-
-
Security Management
(Data Erase)
HDD Data Erase Kit
(activated)
Viewing
Printing
Displaying Web
Web
Pages
Pages
Printing
PDF Files
Encrypted Secured
Printing
Web Access
Software
Encrypted Secure
Print Software
Optional Equipment
Z-Fold
C-Fold
3
To use the Data
Erase function, the
HDD Data Erase Kit
must be activated.
-
-
-
UFR II/PCL/PS
Printer Kit
If the imagePASS is
installed, you cannot
print web pages or
PDF files using the
Web Access
Software.
UFR II/PCL/PS
Printer Kit
To use the features of
the Encrypted
Secure Print
Software, it must be
activated after the
UFR II/PCL/PS
Printer Kit has been
activated.
*1 The Department ID Management function is a standard function in this machine. If the optional Card Reader-C1 is
attached, Department ID Management is performed automatically, and you do not have to enter the Department ID
and password manually. The Card Reader-C1 enables you to check the print totals and the remaining number of
pages that can be printed on the touch panel display.
System Configuration
3-9
Utilities
Using the following utilities, you can specify various settings for Canon devices
connected to a network on your computer.
■ NetSpot Device Installer
NetSpot Device Installer is a utility for specifying the initial settings of Canon devices
connected to a network. Available on the CD-ROM, NetSpot Device Installer can be
accessed directly without installation, enabling network users to quickly and easily specify
the initial settings of network devices.
For the system requirements for NetSpot Device Installer and instructions on how to install
the utility, see the Readme file for NetSpot Device Installer. For instructions on how to
display the Readme file, see the Network Quick Start Guide.
Optional Equipment
3
■ imageWARE Enterprise Management Console
imageWARE Enterprise Management Console is a utility for performing centralized device
management. It enables you use a Web browser to perform various operations, such as
viewing lists of devices, displaying or sending notification of device status, and managing
multiple devices using automated tasks. Also, imageWARE Enterprise Management
Console enables you to jump directly to the Remote UI and perform various settings for
the machine.
For information on the system requirements and the installation procedure for
imageWARE Enterprise Management Console, see the imageWARE Enterprise
Management Console Installation Guide (PDF manual), on the imageWARE Enterprise
Management Console CD-ROM.
■ imageWARE Document Manager Personal
imageWARE Document Manager Personal is software that enables you to manage and
view image data and documents created with various applications. By using it together
with a device via a network connection, you can conduct highly-functional management of
documents. The saved documents are stored in a folder created in the Document
Manager Personal cabinet.
■ imageWARE Document Manager Gateway
imageWARE Document Manager Gateway is software that operates in Windows and
enables you to store documents. You can send and store scanned documents and
received fax documents in a folder created in the Document Manager Personal cabinet.
■ imageWARE Publishing Manager
imageWARE Publishing Manager is an application that enables for easy printing by
making use of the device's functions to the fullest extent. You can create and print various
documents, by setting the page layout and specifying the printing method.
3-10
System Configuration
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1
If you attach the Paper Deck-AD1/AE1 to the machine, you have one additional
source of paper for print jobs.
Up to 3,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)) can be loaded into the paper
deck.
NOTE
The following paper sizes can be loaded into the paper decks:
- Paper Deck-AD1: LTR only
- Paper Deck-AE1: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and LTRR
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1
3-11
3
Optional Equipment
IMPORTANT
If the machine is in the Sleep mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the main
power indicator is lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the
control panel power switch to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button on
the paper deck.
Parts and Their Functions
a
Optional Equipment
3
b
a
b
c
c
Paper Deck-AD1
a Release Button
Press to move the paper deck away from the
main unit when you want to detach it from the
machine.
Paper Deck-AE1
b Open Button
Press to open the paper deck when you need to
load paper or check for a paper jam.
c Paper Supply Indicator
Enables you to check the amount of paper
remaining in the paper deck.
3-12
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher
Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/
Document Insertion Unit-E1
The Finisher-AD1 and Saddle Finisher-AD2 are equipped with the following
finishing modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple.
The Saddle Finisher-AD2 is also equipped with the Saddle Stitch mode.
The Puncher Unit-AT1 is equipped with the Hole Punch mode.
The Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 and Document Insertion Unit-E1 feed
cover sheets when the Cover Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separation, or Booklet
(Saddle Stitch Booklet) mode has been set.
IMPORTANT
If the optional Copy Tray-L1 is attached, you cannot attach an optional finisher.
NOTE
• Either the Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2 can be attached to the main unit.
• The Puncher Unit-AT1, Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1, and Document Insertion
Unit-E1 can be attached only if the Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-13
3
Optional Equipment
The Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 is equipped with the C-Fold and Z-Fold
modes.
Parts and Their Functions
a b
c
a
d
n
n
m
m
g
e
l
l
3
Optional Equipment
f
k
j
i
Saddle Finisher-AD2 and
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1
b
h
Finisher-AD1 and Puncher Unit-AT1
c
g
h
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1
3-14
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
Open this cover to remove jammed paper. (See
"Inside the Top Cover of the Finisher-AD1/
Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional)," on p. 8-37, and
"Output Delivery Unit of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle
Finisher-AD2 (Optional)," on p. 8-40.)
b Paper Feeding Tray of the Document
Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document
Insertion Unit-E1
Feeds cover sheets when Cover/Sheet Insertion
or Booklet mode has been set.
c Top Cover of the Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion
Unit-E1
Open this cover to remove jammed paper. (See
"Insertion Unit (Optional)," on p. 8-53.)
d Top Cover of the Puncher Unit-AT1
Open this cover to remove jammed paper. (See
"Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)," on p. 8-69.)
e Front Cover of the Punch Waste Tray
Open this cover to remove punch waste or to
remove jammed paper. (For instructions on
removing punch waste, see "Removing Punch
Waste," on p. 7-39. For instructions on clearing a
paper jam, see "Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional),"
on p. 8-69.)
f Front Cover of the Finisher-AD1
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge in
the stapler unit, or to clear a staple jam. (For
instructions on replacing the staple cartridge,
see "Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the
Stapler Unit," on p. 7-32. For instructions on
clearing a staple jam, see "Finisher-AD1/Saddle
Finisher-AD2 (Optional)," on p. 8-76.)
g Front Cover of the Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion
Unit-E1
Open this cover to remove jammed paper. (For
instructions on clearing a paper jam in the
document insertion/folding unit/document
insertion unit, see "Inside the Insertion Unit
(Optional)," on p. 8-58, and "Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 (Optional)," on p. 8-62.)
h Exit Slot of the Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1
C-folded prints are output to this exit slot.
i Front Cover of the Saddle Finisher-AD2
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge,
remove jammed paper, or clear a staple jam in
the stapler unit and saddle stitcher unit. (For
instructions on replacing the staple cartridge in
the stapler unit, see "Replacing the Staple
Cartridge in the Stapler Unit," on p. 7-32. For
instructions on replacing the staple cartridge in
the saddle stitcher unit, see "Replacing the
Staple Cartridge in the Saddle Stitcher Unit," on
p. 7-36. For instructions on clearing a paper jam,
see "Inside the Front Cover of the Saddle
Finisher-AD2 (Optional)," on p. 8-45, and
"Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional)," on p. 8-49. For
instructions on clearing a staple jam in the
stapler unit, see "Finisher-AD1/Saddle
Finisher-AD2 (Optional)," on p. 8-76. For
instructions on clearing a staple jam in the
saddle stitcher unit, see "Saddle Stitcher Unit
(Optional)," on p. 8-79.)
j Booklet Tray (Saddle Finisher-AD2 Only)
Prints that are saddle stitched are output to this
tray.
k Booklet Tray Guide (Saddle
Finisher-AD2 Only)
Set this guide to match the size of the output
paper. (See "Finishing Modes," on p. 3-16.)
l Output Tray C
Prints are output to this tray. You can set the Tray
Designation mode to designate this tray for
outputting prints when using certain functions.
(See "Output Tray Designation," on p. 4-39.)
m Output Tray B
Prints are output to this tray. You can set the Tray
Designation mode to designate this tray for
outputting prints when using certain functions.
(See "Output Tray Designation," on p. 4-39.)
n Output Tray A
Prints are output to this tray. You can set the Tray
Designation mode to designate this tray for
outputting prints when using certain functions.
(See "Output Tray Designation," on p. 4-39.)
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-15
3
Optional Equipment
a Top Cover of the Finisher
Finishing Modes
The Finisher-AD1 and Saddle Finisher-AD2 are equipped with the following
finishing modes.
CAUTION
• Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher, as
doing so may damage the trays.
• Do not place anything under the trays of the finisher, as doing so may damage
the trays.
Optional Equipment
3
NOTE
If the Collate or Group mode is set, the output trays move downward as the stack of
paper that is output increases in quantity and thickness. Once an output tray has reached
its stacking limit, subsequent prints are automatically delivered to the next available tray.
If all of the available trays have reached their stacking limits, printing stops temporarily.
Remove all of the output paper from the trays. The trays move upward, and printing
resumes.
■ Collate Mode
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The collated print
sets can be shifted by pressing [Offset].
■ Group Mode
All prints of the same original page are grouped together. The grouped print sets can be
shifted by pressing [Offset].
■ Offset Mode
The print output is shifted alternately to the front and back of the tray, in a vertical (portrait)
orientation, or a horizontal (landscape) orientation, depending on the orientation of your
originals. For example, if you place LTRR originals, the paper is output and shifted in the
horizontal direction. If you place LTR originals, the paper is output and shifted in the
vertical direction.
3-16
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
NOTE
If you press [Offset] when either the Collate or Group mode is set, each set of prints is
shifted approximately 1 1/4" (30 mm) before it is delivered to the output tray.
■ Staple Mode
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. Prints
are stapled in the following places:
• If an original is placed on the platen glass:
Double Staple Area
Corner Staple Area
Optional Equipment
3
Upper Left
Upper Right
Lower Right
Lower Left
Left Side
Right Side
Upper Left
Upper Right
Lower Right
Lower Left
Left Side
Right Side
• If originals are placed in the feeder:
Corner Staple Area
Double Staple Area
Upper Right
Upper Left
Lower Left
Lower Right
Right Side
Upper Right
Upper Left
Lower Left
Lower Right
Right Side
Left Side
Left Side
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-17
CAUTION
Do not place your hands in the part of the tray where stapling is performed (near
the rollers) when a finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.
Optional Equipment
3
IMPORTANT
• If the Staple mode is set, the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is
output increases in quantity and thickness. Once an output tray has reached its stacking
limit, or after 30 sets of prints have been output, printing and stapling stop temporarily.
Remove all of the stapled prints from the output tray, and printing and stapling resume.
• You can corner and double staple 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and EXEC paper.
• You cannot staple transparencies, tracing paper, or labels.
• Do not pull copies or prints out of the output area while they are being stapled. Remove
the copies or prints after they are output to one of the output trays.
3-18
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
NOTE
• The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be stapled together is
as follows (Only 17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2) paper can be used for the main
document. 17 lb bond to 110 lb index (64 to 200 g/m2) paper can be used for the cover
page, and if you feed paper using the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or
Document Insertion Unit-E1, paper that is less than 140 lb index (256 g/m2) can be used
for the cover page):
- LTR, EXEC
(17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2))
30 sheets
(20 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m2))
2 sheets
(24 lb bond to 140 lb index (91 to 256 g/m2))
3
- 11" x 17", LGL, LTRR
30 sheets
(17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2))
20 sheets
(20 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m2))
2 sheets
(24 lb bond to 140 lb index (91 to 256 g/m2))
• If the machine stops while stapling and the message <Load staples.> appears, almost all
of the staples have been used, and the staple cartridge must be replaced. To proceed,
replace the staple cartridge. (See "Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit," on
p. 7-32.)
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-19
Optional Equipment
50 sheets
■ Saddle Stitch Mode
The Saddle Stitch mode enables you to make booklets, consisting of pages folded and
stapled in the center.
Originals
Copy
1
2
3
4
7
2
8
1
5
4
3
Optional Equipment
6
3
1
8
6
3
The pages are folded
and stapled in the center to
form a booklet.
5
6
7
8
IMPORTANT
• The Saddle Stitch mode is available only if the Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached.
• The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be saddle stitched is:
- 15 sheets (17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2))
- 10 sheets (20 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m2))
• The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are: 11" x 17", LGL, or LTRR.
• The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary depending on the
paper type and the number of sheets.
• Make sure to adjust the Booklet Tray guide to match the size of the output paper before
outputting saddle stitched prints, as shown below.
11" x 17" or LGL
LTRR
• A paper jam may occur if the Booklet Tray guide is not adjusted to match the size of the
output paper.
3-20
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
■ Hole Punch Mode
The Hole Punch mode punches two or three holes (depending on the paper size) in the
printed sheets.
NOTE
• The hole punched areas are shown in the illustration below.
Platen Glass
Feeder
Hole
Punched
Area
Hole
Punched
Area
Optional Equipment
3
Hole
Punched
Area
Hole
Punched
Area
• The distance between the punch holes is shown in the illustration below.
4 1/4"
(108 mm)
2 3/4"
(70 mm)
4 1/4"
(108 mm)
Three Holes
Two Holes
IMPORTANT
• The Hole Punch mode is available only if the Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached.
• Only the following paper sizes can be hole punched: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or
EXEC.
• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing paper, labels, or pre-punched paper.
• The machine automatically selects how many holes to punch depending on the selected
paper size.
- Two holes:
LGL, LTRR, EXEC
- Three holes: 11" x 17", LTR
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-21
NOTE
The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine.
However, some paper sizes may not be output, depending on the set functions.
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Size
Output Tray
Tray A Tray B Tray C Booklet Tray
11" x 17"
3
LTR
Optional Equipment
LGL
LTRR
STMTR
EXEC
Free Size 3 7/8" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17"
(99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x
432 mm)
The Booklet Tray can only be used when the Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached.
3-22
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion
Unit-E1
The Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 can be attached to the Finisher-AD1 or
Saddle Finisher-AD2, and is equipped with the Z-Fold and C-Fold modes.
The Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 and Document Insertion Unit-E1 feed
cover sheets when the Cover Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separation, or Booklet
(Saddle Stitch Booklet) mode has been set.
The Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 folds 11" x 17" or LTRR paper into LTR or STMT
size, respectively. When multiple copies of differently sized originals must be made, the
Z-Fold mode enables you to easily handle paper with the same leading edge length but
different width.
Copy
Originals
Leading
Edge
Length
LTR
11" x 17"
Feeding Direction
IMPORTANT
11" x 17" and LTRR paper can be z-folded together. However, if Auto Orientation is set to
'Off', part of the image may cut off.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-23
3
Optional Equipment
■ Z-Fold mode
NOTE
• The Z-folded areas are as shown in the illustration below.
Platen Glass
Z-folds
CBA
3
Optional Equipment
Feeder
Z-folds
• Z-fold paper is output to tray B or C, even if tray A is selected in Tray Designation in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
• The finishing modes available when the Z-Fold mode is set differ according to the paper
size, and are as follows.
- LGL/LTRR: No Collating
- 11" x 17": No Collating, Collate, Offset Collate, Group, Offset Group, Staple, Hole
Punch
• If paper that has been Z-folded is included in the output, the sheets may not be aligned
when output.
3-24
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
■ C-Fold mode
LTRR prints are C-folded to make them into a more convenient size for inserting them into
envelopes.
Copy
Originals
Leading Edge
Length
LTRR
3
Optional Equipment
Feeding Direction
NOTE
• The C-folded areas are as shown in the illustration below.
Platen glass
C-folds
C B A
Feeder
C-folds
• The following is paper size that can be output to the output tray of the machine.
: Available
Paper Size
Output Tray
LTRR
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-25
■ Insertion Unit
When the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separator, or Booklet (Saddle Stitch Booklet)
mode has been set, the document insertion unit feeds the sheets to make a cover. The
document insertion unit is necessary to feed paper which cannot be fed from the main unit
or paper deck (paper which has been color copied, etc.), for use as a cover.
IMPORTANT
• This section assumes that the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document
Insertion Unit-E1 is attached to the optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2.
• Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out before placing it into the
document insertion unit.
• Do not place the following types of paper into the document insertion unit. Doing so may
3
Optional Equipment
cause a paper jam.
- Insertion sheets with holes or tears
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper
- Tab paper
- Clipped or stapled insertion sheets
- Transparencies or other highly transparent insertion sheets
- Tracing paper
- Labels
■ Document Insertion Unit Staple Settings and Output Results Table
How to Place the Cover Sheet/Original
Document
Insertion Unit
Feeder
Platen
Glass
ABC
CBA
Staple
Settings
Corner: Upper Left
Double: Left
Output
Result
ABC
ABC
CBA
ABC
LTR
Corner: Lower Left
Double: Left
ABC
CBA
CBA
ABC
ABC
Corner: Upper Right
Double: Right
ABC
11" ✕ 17" 11" ✕ 17"
LGL
Corner: Lower Left
Double: Left
ABC
ABC
3-26
CBA
ABC
Corner: Upper Right
Double: Right
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
LTR
How to Place the Cover Sheet/Original
Document
Insertion Unit
Feeder
Platen
Glass
ABC
CBA
ABC
CBA
Staple
Settings
Corner: Upper Left
Double: Left
Corner: Upper Right
Double: Right
Output
Result
ABC
ABC
11" ✕ 17"
LGL
11" ✕ 17"
ABC
ABC
3
Optional Equipment
CBA
ABC
LTR
Corner: Upper Left
ABC
CBA
CBA
ABC
ABC
Corner: Lower Right
11" ✕ 17", LGL
Corner: Upper Left
ABC
CBA
ABC
LTR
ABC
CBA
Corner: Lower Right
Corner: Upper Right
Double: Right
Saddle Stitch
ABC
ABC
11" ✕ 17"
LGL
11" ✕ 17"
ABC
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
3-27
Optional Accessories
■ Staples
Optional Equipment
3
Cartridges that hold staples for the Staple and Saddle Stitch modes.
3-28
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1/Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1
Copy Tray-L1
If the Copy Tray-L1 is attached to the machine, the following modes are available:
IMPORTANT
The Copy Tray-L1 can be attached to the machine only if no optional finisher is attached.
3
■ Collate Mode
Optional Equipment
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order before they are
delivered to the output tray.
■ Group Mode
All prints of the same original page are grouped together into sets before they are
delivered to the output tray.
■ Rotate Mode
If originals of the same size are printed, the prints are automatically collated into sets
arranged in page order, and are output in alternating directions to the output tray.
Parts and Their Functions
a
b
a Auxiliary Wire
Pull out the auxiliary wire if you are printing on
paper larger than 11" x 17".
c
b Auxiliary Tray
Pull out the auxiliary tray if you are printing on
large size paper (11" x 17", LGL, or LTRR).
c Output Tray
Prints are output to this tray.
Copy Tray-L1
3-29
NOTE
The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output tray of the machine.
However, some paper sizes may not be output, depending on the set functions.
: Available
Paper Size
Output Tray
11" x 17"
LGL
3
LTRR
Optional Equipment
LTR
STMTR
EXEC
3 7/8" x 5 7/8" to 11 5/8" x 17"
Free Size (99 mm x 148 mm to 299 mm x
432 mm)
*1
*1 Prints may not be output neatly when the Collate or Rotate Collate mode is set, depending on paper size.
3-30
Copy Tray-L1
Card Reader-C1
If the Card Reader-C1 is attached to the machine, you must insert a control card to
operate it. The Card Reader-C1 performs Department ID Management
automatically.
NOTE
• If the Basic Features screen does not appear on the touch panel display when the control
card is inserted, make sure that:
- The control card is inserted in the correct direction.
- The control card is inserted as far as it can go.
- An unusable control card is not inserted. (For example, cards which are damaged or
cards prohibited from use.)
• Insert a usable control card correctly.
• For instructions on turning the power ON, see "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on
p. 1-16.
• If the Card Reader-C1 is attached, the type of card shown below can be used. An optical
type card can manage up to 200 departments.
Optical Type Card
CONTROL CARD III
123
001
Card Reader-C1
3-31
3
Optional Equipment
IMPORTANT
• If you are using a login service other than default authentication, the Limit Functions
mode will not be available.
• If SSO is set as the login service, you cannot use the optional Card Reader-C1.
• If SDL is set as the login service, enter your card number in the Card ID field. For more
information, see the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.
Procedure before Using the Machine
1
Insert the control card into the card slot, making sure that it is
facing in the correct direction.
Optional Equipment
3
The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel
display.
3-32
Card Reader-C1
Procedure after Using the Machine
1
After you finish using the machine, remove the control card.
The touch panel display returns to the screen for inserting the control card.
IMPORTANT
Once you have removed the control card, you cannot operate the machine until the
control card is inserted again.
Department ID Management
This section describes how to change the password and page limit, and how to
check the print totals when a control card is being used.
NOTE
The maximum number of digits that you can store for the password is seven. If you enter
fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
Flow of Additional Functions Operations
This section describes the flow of Additional Functions operations when the
optional Card Reader-C1 is attached.
NOTE
Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you
press
(Reset).
Card Reader-C1
3-33
Optional Equipment
3
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
Optional Equipment
3
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(Log
In/Out).
The System Settings screen is displayed.
2
Press [Dept. ID Management].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3-34
Card Reader-C1
3
Select the desired mode.
4
5
Optional Equipment
3
Specify the desired mode ➞ press [OK].
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
Card Reader-C1
3-35
Changing the Password and Page Limit
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Dept.
ID Management].
Press [Register Dept. ID/Password].
Optional Equipment
3
3
Press [▼] or [▲] to display the department whose password
you want to change ➞ select the department ➞ press [Edit].
NOTE
Press and hold down [▼] or [▲] to quickly and continuously scroll through the
available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large
number of Department IDs are registered.
3-36
Card Reader-C1
4
Enter the new password (up to seven digits) using
(numeric keys).
❑ Press [Password].
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the desired password.
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ enter the same number to confirm the password ➞ press
[OK].
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros
are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
(Clear) to clear the
password.
• You cannot change the Department ID.
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', passwords you enter are not displayed
as asterisks (*******). (See "Setting the Display Method When Entering a
Password," on p. 6-59.)
5
6
If you want to change or set a page limit restriction, press
[Turn Limits On/Off and Set Page Limits].
Set the page limit restriction.
❑ Press [On] under the desired function(s).
To cancel setting a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under the
desired function's name.
NOTE
<Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Copy Limit> and <Print Limit>.
Card Reader-C1
3-37
Optional Equipment
3
❑ Press [
] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) ➞ enter the
page limit restriction using
(numeric keys).
IMPORTANT
• The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a
document either from memory or directly to the recipient.
• The machine stops scanning if a scan limit is reached while the machine is
scanning originals that are being fed from the feeder. (Those originals that were
scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
(Clear) to clear the
number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once the page limit is reached,
copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print
is counted as two pages.
Optional Equipment
3
❑ Press [OK] ➞ [OK].
7
8
If you would like to limit users to certain functions of the
machine, press [Limit Functions].
Press [On] or [Off] next to the functions you want to limit
using Department ID Management ➞ press [OK].
If you select [On] for all of the functions on the screen, Department ID
Management is set for all of the machine's functions.
If you select [Off] for all of the functions on the screen, Department ID
Management is set only for copying or printing operations from computers.
[Send] appears if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional
Super G3 FAX Board is installed, or if only the optional Universal Send Kit is
activated. If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, [Fax] appears.
3-38
Card Reader-C1
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
If the page limit setting is set to 'On', the remaining number of pages that can be
printed (page limit minus the current page count) is displayed on the screen, as
shown below.
3
Optional Equipment
9
Copy Basic Features Screen
The icons that are displayed on the screen are explained below:
Total number of sheets remaining that can be copied or printed
Remaining number of sheets that can be copied
Scan Screen
The icon that is displayed on the screen is explained below:
Remaining number of sheets that can be scanned
Card Reader-C1
3-39
Print Screen
3
Optional Equipment
The icons that are displayed on the screen are explained below:
Total number of sheets remaining that can be copied or printed
Remaining number of sheets that can be printed
Send Screen
The icon that is displayed on the screen is explained below:
Remaining number of sheets that can be scanned
NOTE
• Only the page limits for functions that are set to 'On' are displayed.
• The Send screen appears only if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, and
the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, or if only the optional Universal Send
Kit is activated.
3-40
Card Reader-C1
Checking the Page Counts on a Control Card
You can check the page counts on the control card you are currently using.
1
Press [System Monitor].
2
Press [Pg Ct Check].
Optional Equipment
3
3
Check the page counts ➞ press [Done] ➞ [Done].
Checking and Printing Counter Information
You can display and print a list of how much paper was used by each department.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
Press [Page Totals].
Card Reader-C1
3-41
3
Check or print the page total count.
The print page totals that belong to print jobs without a Department ID (left blank)
are the number of prints from computers that do not correspond with a registered
Department ID. These prints are referred to as prints with unknown IDs.
The scan page totals that belong to scan jobs without a Department ID (left
blank) are the number of pages that have been scanned from computers that do
not correspond with a registered Department ID. The scanned pages from
computers are referred to as network scans with unknown IDs.
● If you only want to check the counter information:
❑ Press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired Department ID ➞ view the desired page
3
Optional Equipment
totals.
NOTE
Press and hold down [▼] or [▲] to quickly and continuously scroll through the
available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large
number of Department IDs are registered.
● If you want to print the displayed list:
❑ Press [Print List].
❑ Press [Yes].
NOTE
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• To close the screen that is displayed while the machine is printing the Page Count
List, press [Done].
• The counter information can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you
press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Auto Paper
Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 4-31.)
4
3-42
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
Card Reader-C1
Clearing Page Totals
You can clear the page totals made for all departments or for specific departments.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
Press [Page Totals].
If necessary, see the screen shot is step 2 of "Checking and Printing Counter
Information," on p. 3-41.
3
Press [Clear All Totals].
To clear one page total at a time by department, press [▼] or [▲] to display the
desired department ➞ select the department ➞ press [Clear].
4
Press [Yes].
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs
You can specify whether to accept or reject print and network scan jobs from
computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
NOTE
• <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is displayed only if the machine is equipped with
the Printer function.
• For more information on the Network Scan function, see the Network ScanGear User's
Guide.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
Card Reader-C1
3-43
3
Optional Equipment
1
2
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Optional Equipment
<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs>:
[On]:
The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond
with a registered Department ID.
[Off]:
The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID.
<Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs>:
3-44
[On]:
The machine accepts remote scan jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID.
[Off]:
The machine does not accept remote scan jobs from computers that do
not correspond with a registered Department ID.
Card Reader-C1
Customizing Settings
4
CHAPTER
This chapter explains how to change the machine's Common, Timer, and Adjustment/Cleaning
Settings, as well as their default settings and how to customize them to suit your needs.
What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Specifying Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Default Display after Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Tone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Display the Remaining Paper Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Inch Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Paper Select Screen Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Distinguishing LTRR and STMT Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Output Tray Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Setting the Printing Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Image Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
User-Defined Text for Page Numbers and Watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Standard Local Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Reversing the Contrast of the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Alternating the Print Output (Offset Jobs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Copy Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Storing Paper Sizes for the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Setting an Output Tray to Hold Different Paper Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Clean the Original Scanning Area Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Limiting Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
4-1
4. Customizing Settings
Forcing to Output Excess Tab Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Timer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Current Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Auto Sleep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Time Until the Unit Quiets Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Daily Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Adjusting the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4
Zoom Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Customizing Settings
Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Adjusting Creep (Displacement) Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Fold Placement Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Exposure Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Character/Background Contrast Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Automatic Feeder Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Wire Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Drum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Displaying the Procedure for Cleaning the Original Scanning Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4-2
What Are Additional Functions?
Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.
NOTE
Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed, even if you
press
(Reset).
1
Press
(Additional Functions).
The Additional Functions screen is displayed.
2
Select an Additional Functions setting.
If you select System Settings and the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys) ➞ press
(Log In/Out).
What Are Additional Functions?
4-3
4
Customizing Settings
IMPORTANT
• If you are performing user authentication using the SDL or SSO login service, you cannot
change the Additional Functions settings of the machine if you are logged in as a general
user.
• If you are logged in as an Administrator, you can change the Additional Functions
settings of the machine. (When the dialog box prompting you to enter the System
Manager ID and System Password appears, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password).
3
Press a mode key to specify its settings.
For an overview of all the settings you can change from the Additional Functions
screen, see "Additional Functions Settings Table," on p. 4-6.
4
Customizing Settings
NOTE
The Common Settings, Adjustment/Cleaning, System Settings, and Copy Settings
screens consist of a list of individual settings. Press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired setting.
4
Specify the desired mode ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
4-4
What Are Additional Functions?
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen
appears.
4
Customizing Settings
5
What Are Additional Functions?
4-5
Additional Functions Settings Table
The following settings can be selected or stored from the Additional Functions
screen. (*1 indicates the default setting.) For more information, consult the following
guides.
• Copy Settings:
Copying and Mail Box Guide
• Report Settings, Communications Settings,
and Address Book Settings:
Sending and Facsimile Guide
Customizing Settings
4
• Mail Box Settings:
Copying and Mail Box Guide
• Printer Settings and Report Settings:
PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Guide
• Network Settings and Report Settings:
Network Guide
• Remote UI Settings:
Remote UI Guide
The Additional Functions Screen
4-6
Additional Functions Settings Table
The System Settings Screen
■ Common Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
No
p. 4-26
Function Display
Settings
Copy*1, Send, Mail Box, Print Job, Scan,
MEAP
Copy Screen
Display Settings
Regular Copy Only, Regular and Express
Copy*1, Express Copy Only
Set System
Monitor as the
Default Screen
On, Off*1
4
Set the Default
Screen for System Copy, Send, Fax, Print, Receive, Device*1
Monitor
Auto Clear Setting
Initial Function*1, Selected Function
Yes
p. 4-29
Audible Tones
Entry Tone: On*1, Off
Invalid Entry Tone: On, Off*1
Restock Supplies Tone: On, Off*1
Error Tone: On*1, Off
Job Done Tone: On*1, Off
Yes
p. 4-30
Display Remaining
Paper Message
On*1, Off
No
p. 4-30
Inch Entry
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 4-31
Copy, Printer, Mail Box, Receive/Fax,
Other: (Stack Bypass: On, Off*1, All Other
Paper Sources: On*1, Off)
No
p. 4-31
No
p. 4-33
No
p. 4-35
Yes
p. 4-36
Drawer Eligibility
For APS/ADS
Copy: Consider Paper Type: On*1, Off
Paper Drawers 1 and 2, and Paper
Deck-AD1 or Paper Deck-AE1:
Register Paper
Type
Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Letterhead,
Bond, Pre-punched, Heavy
Paper Drawers 3 and 4:
Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Letterhead,
Bond, Pre-punched, Heavy, Tab Paper
Paper Select
Screen Priority
Simple*1, Detailed
Energy Saver Mode -10%*1, -25%, -50%, None
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-7
Customizing Settings
Initial Functions
and Function
Order Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Energy
Consumption in
Sleep Mode
Low*1, High
Yes
p. 4-37
LTRR/STMT
Original Selection
Distinguishing Manually, Use LTRR
Format*1, Use STMT Format
Yes
p. 4-38
Yes*3
p. 4-39
If the Optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle
Finisher-AD2 Is Attached:
4
Tray A:
Copy, Mail Box,
Printer, Receive*1,
Fax*1, Other*1
Tray B:
Copy*1, Mail Box*1,
Printer*1, Receive,
Fax, Other
Customizing Settings
Tray Designation*2
Tray C:
Copy*1, Mail Box*1,
Printer*1, Receive,
Fax, Other
Tray Home Position: Tray B*1, Tray C,
Off
4-8
Printing Priority
Copy: 1*1, 2, 3
Printer: 1, 2*1, 3
Mail Box, Receive/Fax, Other: 1, 2, 3*1
Yes
p. 4-40
Register Form for
Form Composition
Register, Erase, Check Print, Details
No
p. 4-41
Register
Characters for
Page No./
Watermark
Register, Edit, Erase
Yes
p. 4-44
Stack Bypass
Standard Settings
On, Off*1
No
p. 4-46
Additional Functions Settings Table
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Standard Local
Print Settings
Paper Select
All Paper Sources, Auto*1
Copies
1*1 to 9,999 sets
If the Optional Copy Tray-L1 Is Attached:
Do Not Collate, Collate*1, Rotate
Collate, Group, Rotate Group
If the Optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle
Finisher-AD2 Is Attached:
Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1,
Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner:
Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom
Right), (Double: Left, Right)
Customizing Settings
4
If the Optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle
Finisher-AD2, and Puncher Unit-AT1 Are
Attached:
Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1,
Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner:
Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom
Right), (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch
Finishing
No
p. 4-47
If the Optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle
Finisher-AD2, and Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 Are Attached:
Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1,
Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner:
Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom
Right), (Double: Left, Right), Z-Fold,
C-Fold
If the Optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle
Finisher-AD2, and Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 and Puncher Unit-AT1
Are Attached:
Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1,
Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner:
Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom
Right), (Double: Left, Right), Z-Fold,
C-Fold, Hole Punch
Face Up/Face Down:
Auto*1, Face Down (Normal), Face Up
(Reverse)
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-9
Item
Settings
2-Sided Print
On, Off*1
Erase Document
After Printing
On, Off*1
Delivered
Applicable
Page
No
p. 4-47
No
p. 4-48
Merge Documents On, Off*1
On, Off*1
Language Switch
Customizing Settings
4
Display Shortcut
Key:
On, Off*1
Reversed Display
(Color)
On, Off*1
No
p. 4-49
Offset Jobs*2
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 4-49
Job Separator
between Jobs
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 4-50
Job Separator
between Copies
On, Off*1
No
p. 4-51
Job Duration
Display
Copy:
Mail Box:
Other:
No
p. 4-52
Register Sizes for
Side Paper Deck*2
A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR,
LTRR
No
p. 4-52
Different Paper
Sizes for the Output On*1, Off
Tray*2
Yes
p. 4-53
Cleaning Display
for the Original
Scanning Area
On*1, Off
No
p. 4-53
Limited Functions
Mode*2
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 4-54
Shutdown Mode
Press [Start]
No
p. 1-21
Unfinished Tab
Paper Forced
Output
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 4-54
Initialize Common
Settings
Initialize
No
p. 4-55
On, Off*1
On, Off*1
On, Off*1
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*3 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines
is the same.
4-10
Additional Functions Settings Table
■ Timer Settings
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Time Fine Adjustment
00:00 to 23:59, in one minute
increments
No
p. 4-56
Auto Sleep Time
10 sec 1, 2, 10, 15*1, 20, 30, 40, 50
min.,
1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours
Yes
p. 4-56
Auto Clear Time
0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute
increments; 2 min.*1
Yes
p. 4-57
Time Until Unit Quiets
Down
0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute
increments; 1 min. *1
Yes
p. 4-57
Daily Timer Settings
Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to
23:59, in one minute increments
Yes
p. 4-58
Delivered
Applicable
Page
*1 Indicates the default setting.
■ Adjustment/Cleaning
Item
Settings
Zoom Fine Adjustment
X, Y: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1%
increments; 0.0%*1
No
p. 4-59
Saddle Stitcher Staple
Repositioning*2
Press [Start]
No
p. 4-59
Saddle Stitch Position
Adjustment*2
All paper sizes: -2.0 mm to +2.0
mm, in 0.25 mm increments; 0.00
mm*1
Yes
p. 4-60
Creep (Displacement)
Correction Adjustment
Correction (for each paper type)
0.000" to 0.078" (0.00 mm to 2.00
mm), in 0.002" (0.05 mm)
increments; 0.010" (0.25 mm) *1
No
p. 4-61
No
p. 4-61
No
p. 4-62
Z-Fold Placement Adjustment
-2.0 mm to +1.5mm, in 0.5 mm
increments; 0.0 mm*1
Fold Placement
Adjustment
Exposure Recalibration
C-Fold Placement Adjustment
A:0.0 mm to 6.0 mm, in 0.5 mm
increments; 0.0 mm*1
B:0.0 mm to 3.0 mm, in 0.5 mm
increments; 0.0 mm*1
Copy/Inbox, Send:
Light, Dark: 1 to 9 levels; 5*1
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-11
4
Customizing Settings
Item
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
No
p. 4-62
Relative Contrast Value: -7 to +7;
0*1 (for the imageRUNNER 5075/
5065/5055), -1*1 (for the
imageRUNNER 5050), Sample
Print, Sample Print Settings
Character/Background
Contrast Adjustment*2
Standard Value Settings: 0 to 64;
20*1 (for the imageRUNNER
5075),
28*1 (for the imageRUNNER 5065/
5055), 16*1 (for the
imageRUNNER 5050)
Latent String Density: 0 to 36; 7*1
(for the imageRUNNER 5075),
6*1 (for the imageRUNNER 5065/
5055/5050)
Customizing Settings
4
Feeder Cleaning
Press [Start]
No
p. 4-65
Wire Cleaning
Press [Start]
No
p. 4-66
Drum Cleaning
Press [Start]
No
p. 4-66
Original Scanning Area
Cleaning Method
Follow the instructions on the
screen
No
p. 4-67
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
4-12
Additional Functions Settings Table
■ Report Settings*2
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Settings: Send
TX Report
For Error Only*1, On, Off
Yes
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Activity Report
Auto Print
On*1, Off
Daily Activity Report
Time
On, Off*1
Send/Receive Separate
On, Off*1
Yes
Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59
Fax TX Report
For Error Only*1, On, Off
Yes
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print
On*1, Off
Daily Activity Report
Time
On, Off*1
Send/Receive Separate
On, Off*1
Yes
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59
Fax RX Report
For Error Only, On, Off*1
Yes
Confidential Fax Inbox RX
Report
On*1, Off
Yes
Address Book List
Address Book 1 to 10;
One-touch Buttons, Print List
No
User Data List
Print List
No
Print List
No
Print List: Send
Print List: Fax
User Data List
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-13
Customizing Settings
4
Settings: Fax
■ System Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Yes
p. 6-3
System Manager Settings
System Manager ID
Seven digit number maximum
System Password
Seven digit number maximum
System Manager
32 characters maximum
E-mail Address
64 characters maximum
Contact Information
32 characters maximum
Comment
32 characters maximum
Dept. ID Management
Customizing Settings
4
Dept. ID Management
On, Off*1
Yes
Register Dept. ID/Password
Register, Edit, Erase, Limit
Functions
Yes
Page Totals
Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals
No
Allow Printer Jobs with
Unknown IDs*2
On*1, Off
Yes
Allow Remote Scan Jobs
with Unknown IDs
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 6-5
Communications
Settings*2
E-mail/I-Fax Common
Settings
Maximum Data Size for
Sending
0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1
Default Subject
40 characters maximum;
Attached Image*1
Specify Authorized User
Reply-to Destination
Yes
On, Off*1
No
On, Off*1
No
E-mail Settings
Specify Authorized User
Dest. Sender
4-14
Additional Functions Settings Table
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
I-Fax Settings
Full Mode TX Timeout
1 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1
Divided Data RX Timeout
0 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1
Print MDN/DSN on
Receipt
On, Off*1
Yes
Always send notice for RX
On*1, Off
errors
Use Send Via Server
On, Off*1
Allow MDN Not Via Server On, Off*1
Send Start Speed
33600 bps*1, 14400 bps,
9600 bps, 7200 bps,
4800 bps, 2400 bps
Yes
Receive Start Speed
33600 bps*1, 14400 bps,
9600 bps, 7200 bps,
4800 bps, 2400 bps
Yes
Receive Password
20 digits maximum
No
PIN Code Access
On, Off*1
Yes
Memory RX Inbox
Password
Seven digit number
No
Use Fax Memory Lock
On, Off*1
Yes
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
On, Off*1
Yes
Memory Lock Start Time
Everyday, Select Days, Off*1
Yes
Memory Lock End Time
Everyday, Select Days, Off*1
Yes
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Memory RX Inbox Settings
Remote UI
On*1,
Off
Use SSL*4: On, Off*1
Yes
p. 6-17
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-15
Customizing Settings
4
Fax Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Restrict the Send
Function*2
Customizing Settings
4
Address Book Password
Seven digit number
Yes
Access Number
Management
On, Off*1
Yes
Restrict New Addresses
Fax: On, Off*1
E-mail: On, Off*1
I-fax: On, Off*1
File: On, Off*1
Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX
On*1,
Off
Yes
Confirm Entered Fax
Numbers
On, Off*1
Yes
E-mail/I-Fax Domain
Sending Restriction
Restrict Sending to Domains;
On, Off*1
Register, Edit, Erase*4
Yes
Allow PDF Send with
Expired Certificates
On, Off*1
Yes
Always Add Device
Signature to Send PDF
On, Off*1
Yes
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Device Information
Settings
No
p. 6-19
Receive Type, E-mail Priority,
Edit, Erase, Print List
No
Validate/Invalidate, Register
(Registered Forwarding Settings),
Forward w/o Conditions
Yes
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Clear
No
p. 6-20
Device Name
32 characters maximum
Location
32 characters maximum
Forwarding
Settings*2
Clear Message Board
Auto Online/Offline
4-16
p. 6-21
Auto Online
On, Off*1
Auto Offline
On, Off*1
Additional Functions Settings Table
Yes
p. 6-21
p. 6-21
Delivered
Applicable
Page
No
p. 6-23
Register, Edit, Erase, Register/
Edit LDAP Search, Print List
No
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
License Registration
24 characters maximum
No
p. 6-25
Copy Set Numbering
Option Settings
Copy Set Num. Op:
On (ID/User Name: On, Off; Date:
On, Off; Characters: On, Off),
Off*1
Yes
p. 6-28
Display Status Before
Authentication
On*1, Off
No
p. 6-30
Allow Secured Print from
Print Status Screen
On, Off*1
No
p. 6-31
No
p. 6-31
Yes
p. 6-33
No
p. 6-34
Item
Settings
Date and Time Setting (12 digit
number)
Date & Time Settings
Time Zone:
GMT -12:00 to GMT +12:00;
GMT -05:00*1
Daylight Saving Time: On, Off*1
System Monitor Screen
Restriction
On*1, Off
Job Log Display
Obtain Job Log From
Management Software: Permit,
Do Not Allow*1
MEAP Settings
Use HTTP
On*1, Off
Use SSL*4: On, Off*1
Print System Information
Print
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-17
4
Customizing Settings
Register LDAP
Server*2
Item
Settings
Device Information
Delivery Settings
Register Destinations
Delivered
Applicable
Page
p. 6-37
Auto Search/Register, Register,
Details, Erase, Print List
p. 6-40
Everyday, Select Days, Off*1
Add. Functions Settings Value:
On
(Network Settings: Include,
Exclude*1), Off*1
Dept. ID: On, Off*1
4
Address Book: On, Off*1
Customizing Settings
Auto Delivery Settings
Printer Settings: On, Off*1
p. 6-45
Paper Information: On, Off*1
Add. Functions Settings Value:
On (Network Settings: Include,
Exclude*1), Off*1
Manual Delivery
Dept. ID: On, Off*1
p. 6-48
Address Book: On, Off*1
Printer Settings: On, Off*1
Paper Information: On, Off*1
Restrictions for Receiving
Device Info.
On*1, Off
p. 6-49
Restore Data
Add. Functns Set. Value, Dept.
ID, Address Book, Printer
Settings, Paper Information
p. 6-50
Add. Functions Settings Value:
On*1, Off
Receive Restriction for
Each Function
Dept. ID: On*1, Off
Address Book: On*1, Off
Printer Settings: On, Off*1
Paper Information: On, Off*1
4-18
Additional Functions Settings Table
p. 6-51
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Details, Print List, Report
Settings
Auto Print: On*1, Off
Communication Log
p. 6-52
Daily Activity Report Time: On
(00:00 to 23:59), Off*1
Separate Report Type: On, Off*1
Initialize All Data/Settings
Initialize
No
p. 6-54
Display ID/User Name
On*1, Off
No
p. 6-56
On, Off*1
No
p. 6-57
Use USB Device
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 6-58
Use USB Host
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 6-58
Use Asterisks to Enter
Access No./Passwords
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 6-59
Copy:
Do Not Set*1, Set
Mail Box: Do Not Set*1, Set
Printer: Do Not Set*1, Set
Yes
p. 6-60
Do Not Set*1, Set
Yes
p. 6-63
Only Allow Encrypted Print
Jobs
USB Settings
Secure Watermark Mode*2
Forced Secure Watermark
Printer Driver Secure
Watermark
Details/Edit
Paper Type Management
Settings
Name, Basis Weight, Type,
Finish, Creep (Displacement)
Correction Adjustment, Color
Yes
p. 6-67
Duplicate, Erase
No
UFR II, PCL5e, PCL6, PS3, FAX
No
p. 6-72
Time until Document Auto
Erase
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2,
3*1, 7, 30 days
No
p. 6-73
Print Upon Storing From
the Printer Driver
On, Off*1
No
p. 6-74
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 6-75
PDL Selection (PnP) *2
Settings for All User
Inboxes
Restrict Printer Jobs*2
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-19
4
Customizing Settings
Encrypted Print
Settings*2
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*4 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
■ Copy Settings
Item
Paper Select Key Size for
Express Copy Screen
Customizing Settings
4
Settings
Large*1: Four paper sources
maximum (Stack Bypass, Stack
bypass Settings,
1: Paper Drawer 1,
2: Paper Drawer 2,
3: Paper Drawer 3,
4: Paper Drawer 4,
5: Paper Deck-AD1/AE1),
Small
Standard Key 1, 2 Settings
Various modes; No Settings*1
for Regular Screen
Delivered
No
No
Standard Key Settings for
Express Copy Screen
Displayed Standard Keys:
Up to 5 Set Keys*1, Up to 10 Set
Keys, Settings:
Various modes; No Settings*1
No
Auto Collate*2
On*1, Off
Yes
Image Orientation Priority
On, Off*1
Yes
Auto Orientation
On*1, Off
Yes
Off*1
Yes
Photo Mode
On,
Standard Settings
Store, Initialize
No
Register Remote Device
Move To Top, Register (Seven
devices maximum), Details, Erase
No
Remote Device
Transmission Timeout
5 to 30 seconds; 30 seconds*1
Yes
Initialize Copy Settings
Initialize
No
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
4-20
Additional Functions Settings Table
Applicable
Page
Copying
and Mail
Box Guide
■ Communications Settings*2
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Common Settings:
TX Settings
01 to 99, Register/Edit, Erase
No
Unit Name
24 characters maximum
No
Erase Failed TX
On*1, Off
Yes
Handle Documents with
Forwarding Errors
Always Print, Store/Print, Off*1
Yes
Photo Mode
On, Off*1
Yes
Retry Times
0 to 5 times; 3 times*1
Yes
Edit Standard Send
Settings
Scanning Mode: Black 200 x 200
dpi
File Format: TIFF/PDF
Stamp: Off
Divide into Pages: Off
No
Register Favorites Button
Register/Edit, Erase (M1 to M18)
Yes
Display Confirmation for
Favorites Button
On*1, Off
No
PDF(OCR) Settings
Smart Scan: On*1, Off
Num. of Char. for Doc. Name
Setting:
1 to 24 characters; 24 characters*1
Yes
Check Device Signature
Certificate
Certificate Details: Certificate
Verification
No
Check User Signature
Certificate
Certificate Details: Certificate
Verification
No
Default Screen for Send
Favorites Buttons (Enlarged
Display: On, Off*1), One-touch
Buttons, New Address*1
No
4
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-21
Customizing Settings
Sender's Names (TTI)
Item
Settings
Delivered
TX Terminal ID
On*1 (Printing Position: Inside,
Outside*1;Display Destination
Name: On*1, Off; Telephone #
Mark: FAX*1, TEL), Off
Yes
Use Chunked Encoding
with WebDAV Sending
On*1, Off
Yes
Confirm When Sending
2-Sided Org. with Stamp
On*1, Off
No
Initialize TX Settings
Initialize
No
Applicable
Page
Common Settings:
RX Settings
4
Customizing Settings
2-Sided Print
On, Off*1
Yes
On*1,
Select Drawer
Switch A:
Off
Switch B: On*1, Off
Switch C: On*1, Off
Switch D: On*1, Off
Yes
On*1, Off
Receive Reduction
RX Reduction: Auto*1, Fixed
Reduction
Reduce %: 75 to 97% (in 1%
increments); 90%*1
Reduce Direction: Vertical &
Horizontal, Vertical Only*1
Yes
Received Page Footer
On, Off*1
Yes
2 On 1 Log
On, Off*1
Yes
Unit Telephone #
20 digits maximum
No
Tel Line Type
Pulse, Tone*1
Fax Settings:
User Settings
Volume Control
4-22
Additional Functions Settings Table
No
4*1
Alarm Volume: 0 to 8 levels;
Monitor Volume: 0 to 8 levels; 4*1
Yes
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Fax Settings:
TX Settings
ECM TX
On*1, Off
Yes
Pause Time
1 to 15 seconds; 2 seconds*1
Yes
On*1: Option:
Redial Times:
1 to 10 times;
2 times*1
2 to 99 minutes;
2 minutes*1
Auto Redial
Yes
TX Error Resend
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
Error and 1st Page*1, All
pages, Off
Off
Check Dial Tone Before
Sending
On*1, Off
Yes
On, Off*1
Yes
Fax Settings:
RX Settings
ECM RX
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-23
4
Customizing Settings
Redial Interval:
■ Mail Box Settings
Item
Delivered
Inbox No.: 00 to 99
Register Inbox Name: 24
characters maximum
Password: Seven digits maximum
Time until Document Auto Erase:
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2,
3*1, 7, 30 days
URL Send Settings
Print upon storing from the printer
driver: On, Off*1
Initialize*4
Yes*5
Applicable
Page
Copying
and Mail
Box Guide
4
Photo Mode
On, Off*1
Yes
Customizing Settings
User Inboxes Settings
Settings
Standard Scan Settings
Store, Initialize
No
Confidential Fax Inboxes
Settings*2
Inbox No.: 00 to 49
Register Inbox Name: 24
characters maximum
Password: Seven digits maximum
URL Send Settings
Initialize*4
Yes*5
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*4 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
*5 Information is not delivered if a password is set for the inbox.
■ Address Book Settings*2
Item
Settings
Delivered
Register New Address, Edit,
Erase
Yes
Register Address Book
Name
Register Name
Yes
One-touch Buttons
Register/Edit (from 001 to 200),
Erase
Yes
Register Address
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
4-24
Additional Functions Settings Table
Applicable
Page
Sending
and
Facsimile
Guide
IMPORTANT
• If you are performing user authentication using the SDL or SSO login service, you cannot
change the Additional Functions settings of the machine if you are logged in as a general
user.
• If you are logged in as an Administrator, you can change the Additional Functions
settings of the machine. (When the dialog box prompting you to enter the System
Manager ID and System Password appears, enter the System Manager ID and System
Password).
NOTE
Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set,
is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For information on the Device Information
Delivery Settings, see "Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings," on p. 6-37.
Customizing Settings
4
Additional Functions Settings Table
4-25
Specifying Common Settings
You can specify the settings that are common to the Copy, Mail Box, Send, and Fax
functions.
Initial Function at Power ON
You can specify the screen that is displayed when you turn ON the main power, or
after the Auto Clear mode initiates.
Customizing Settings
4
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Function Display Settings].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
● If you want to change the initial function screen or change the order
of the function keys:
❑ Press [Settings] for <Initial Function and Function Order Settings>.
❑ Select a function.
To set the screen of the selected function as the initial function screen, press
[Set as Initial Function].
NOTE
If you select [MEAP], it takes longer to start the machine. If no MEAP applications
are installed, a message telling you that there are no MEAP applications installed
appears.
4-26
Specifying Common Settings
❑ Press [Up] or [Down] to move the function's key to the desired position or group
➞ press [Next].
The function keys are divided into the following groups:
The selected function keys are displayed on page 1 of the Basic
Features screen.
Group B:
The selected function keys are displayed on page 2 of the Basic
Features screen.
❑ Select a function group.
❑ Press [Up] or [Down] to move the function group to the desired position ➞
press [OK].
Specifying Common Settings
4-27
4
Customizing Settings
Group A:
● If you want to set the display for the Copy Basic Features screen:
❑ Press [Settings] for <Copy Screen Display Settings>.
❑ Press [Regular Copy Only], [Regular and Express Copy], or [Express Copy
Only] ➞ press [OK].
4
Customizing Settings
If you select [Regular and Express Copy], the Regular Copy Screen is
displayed by priority.
● If you want to set the System Monitor screen as the initial function
screen:
❑ Press [On] for <Set System Monitor as the Default Screen>.
● If you want to set the default System Monitor screen:
❑ Press [Settings] for <Set the Default Screen for System Monitor>.
❑ Select [Copy], [Send], [Fax], [Print], [Receive], or [Device] under <Default
Status Type> ➞ select [Status] or [Log] under <Status/Log>.
❑ Press [OK].
4-28
Specifying Common Settings
Default Display after Auto Clear
You can set whether the screen specified as the Initial Function is displayed after
the Auto Clear mode initiates.
NOTE
The time necessary for the Auto Clear mode to initiate can be set. (See "Auto Clear
Time," on p. 4-57.)
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Auto
Clear Setting].
2
Select [Initial Function] or [Selected Function] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Initial Function]:
The screen specified as the initial function in [Function
Display Settings] in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is displayed after the Auto Clear mode
initiates. For example, if you set the System Monitor screen
as the initial screen in [Function Display Settings], and the
Auto Clear mode initiates while a settings screen for the
Mail Box function is shown, the display returns to the
System Monitor screen.
[Selected Function]: The display returns to the main screen of the function that
was displayed before the Auto Clear mode initiated. For
example, even if you set the System Monitor screen as the
initial screen in [Function Display Settings], and the Auto
Clear mode initiates while a settings screen for the Mail
Box function is shown, the display returns to the Inbox
Selection screen of the Mail Box Function.
Specifying Common Settings
4-29
4
Customizing Settings
1
Tone Settings
You can set whether to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the
following times:
• Entry Tone:
When pressing keys on the control panel or keys on the
touch panel display
• Invalid Entry Tone:
When an invalid key on the control panel or touch panel
display is pressed, or when the maximum number of
characters allowed is exceeded
• Restock Supplies Tone: When the toner cartridge needs to be replaced
Customizing Settings
4
• Error Tone:
When a malfunction occurs (e.g., paper jam or
operational error)
• Job Done Tone:
After a job completes (e.g., outputting, stapling, or faxing
is complete)
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Audible Tones].
2
Select [On] or [Off] for the desired tones ➞ press [OK].
Display the Remaining Paper Message
You can set to display the message indicating that the remaining paper loaded in a
paper drawer is low.
4-30
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Display Remaining Paper Message].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Common Settings
Inch Entry
Specifying this setting ensures that the key for entering values in inches is
displayed on the various numeric entry screens.
NOTE
Even if Inch Entry is set to 'On', you still have the option to enter measurements in
millimeters by pressing [mm] on the various numeric entry screens.
2
Press
Entry].
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Inch
4
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching
You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection and
Auto Drawer Switching. This setting can be made independently for all functions of
the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use different paper sources
for different purposes.
NOTE
Paper sources set to 'On' are used for the following functions:
- APS (Auto Paper Selection): The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper
size (paper source) based on the original's size and copy ratio settings (when making a
copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax).
- ADS (Auto Drawer Switching): If a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous
print job, the machine automatically selects another paper source with the same paper
size, and begins feeding paper from that paper source.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS].
Specifying Common Settings
4-31
Customizing Settings
1
2
Select [Copy], [Printer], [Mail Box], [Receive/Fax], or [Other].
Remote Copy jobs are included in [Copy].
[Printer] appears only if the optional UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit or imagePASS is
available for use.
[Receive/Fax] appears if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, and the
optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. If only the optional Universal Send Kit is
activated, [Receive] appears. If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is
installed, [Fax] appears.
[Other] is used for specifying the paper source for printing reports.
3
4
Select [On] or [Off] for the stack bypass and the other paper
sources ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
The paper source is eligible for APS/ADS.
[Off]:
The paper source is ineligible for APS/ADS.
The numbers on the screen represent the following paper sources:
Stack Bypass
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
Paper Drawer 3
Paper Drawer 4
Paper Deck-AD1 (optional)
The optional Saddle Finisher-AD2, Puncher Unit-AT1, and Paper Deck-AD1 are
attached.
4-32
Specifying Common Settings
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source
This setting enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper source.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to correctly set the paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could
adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and
require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Paper Type].
Specifying Common Settings
4-33
4
Customizing Settings
NOTE
• Regardless of the stack bypass setting, you cannot select 'Off' for all of the paper
sources at the same time. At least one of the paper sources, besides the stack
bypass must be set to 'On'.
• The settings under [Copy] include an option called [Consider Paper Type], which
determines whether the machine considers the paper type loaded in a paper
source.
- If [Consider Paper Type] is set to 'On', paper is not fed from another paper source
when the original paper source runs out of paper, unless another paper source is
loaded with the same paper size and type. For more information on stored paper
types, see "Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source," on p. 4-33.
- If [Consider Paper Type] is set to 'Off', paper is fed from another paper source
when paper in the current paper source runs out, as long as the same paper size/
type is loaded in that paper source.
• If you selected [Printer] in step 2, the Stack Bypass icon ( ) will not be displayed
on the paper selection screen.
2
Select the paper source in which you want to register the
paper type.
The numbers on the screen represent the following paper sources:
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
Paper Drawer 3
Paper Drawer 4
Paper Deck-AD1 (optional)
4
Customizing Settings
The optional Saddle Finisher-AD2, Puncher Unit-AT1, and Paper Deck-AD1 are
attached.
3
Select the desired paper type loaded in the paper source ➞
press [OK].
If you want to select a paper type that is not in the list, press [Detailed Settings] ➞
select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
Make sure that the registered paper type setting is the same paper type that is
loaded in the paper source.
● If you want to register tab paper:
❑ Press [Tab Paper].
[Tab Paper] is displayed when Paper Drawer 3 or 4 is selected.
❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the number of tabs ➞ press [Done].
You can load tab paper with up to 10 tabs.
4-34
Specifying Common Settings
NOTE
• The default setting for the number of tabs for tab paper is '5'.
• For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-52.
• For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-52.
• You can register a paper type that is not listed in [Detailed Settings] in the Stack
Bypass Settings: Selecting the Paper Type screen. For details on registering paper
types, see "Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types," on p. 6-67.
• The registered paper type information is displayed through the use of icons on the
paper selection screen, as shown below.
Customizing Settings
4
Paper Select Screen Priority
You can set whether priority is given to the simple setting screen for paper type, or
the detailed setting screen when displaying the paper type selection screen from
the paper size selection screen.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Paper Select Screen Priority].
2
Select [Simple] or [Detailed] ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Common Settings
4-35
Energy Saver Mode
If you press (Energy Saver) on the control panel, the machine goes into the
Energy Saver mode. While in the Energy Saver mode, the temperature of the fixing
unit is lowered, which enables you to conserve electricity.
You can set the energy saving level to -10%, -25%, -50%, or None.
Energy Saving Level
Approximate Recovery Time (seconds)
-10%
4
-25%
6
-50%
8
None
0
Customizing Settings
4
NOTE
After deactivating the Energy Saver mode, the machine's recovery time may vary,
depending on the energy saving level setting and the surrounding environment (i.e.,
temperature, humidity, etc.).
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Energy Saver Mode].
2
Select the desired energy saving level ➞ press [OK].
If you want to be able to copy or print immediately, select [None] (0%).
4-36
Specifying Common Settings
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode
You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the
Sleep mode.
Report Settings
Settings
Send
The Daily Activity Report Time setting for
the Activity Report is set to 'On'.*1
Fax
The Daily Activity Report Time setting for
the FAX Activity Report is set to 'On'.*1
Communications
Settings
Memory RX Inbox
Settings
Time limit for receiving fax documents in
memory is set.*1
Network Settings
TCP/IP Settings
Use IPv6 is set to 'On'.
DHCP is set to 'On'.
NetWare Settings
NetWare is set to 'On'.
AppleTalk Settings
AppleTalk is set to 'On'.
SMB Server Settings
SMB is set to 'On'.
E-Mail/I-Fax
The POP Interval setting is set to fewer
than '10' minutes. (Excluding when the
POP Interval is set to '0'.)
System Settings
*1 If there is more than 10 minutes remaining before the specified time, the machine consumes the same amount
of energy as when the energy consumption level is set to 'Low'.
Specifying Common Settings
4-37
4
Customizing Settings
NOTE
• The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely, depending on the status and
type of installed MEAP applications (e.g., there still may be applications running in the
background consuming power).
• If there are less than 10 minutes remaining before a Delayed Send job is to be sent, the
machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.
• If you are using a management application to view or manage the settings and status of
the machine via the network, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
• If you are using the machine as a Windows printer, the machine may not enter the Sleep
mode completely if SNMP Status is enabled for your operating system (unless your
computer is turned OFF). For more information on disabling SNMP Status, contact your
network administrator.
• In some cases, the energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is 'High' even when the
energy consumption level is set to 'Low' when:
- A job is being processed (including a forwarding job, report job, receive job, and
sending a forwarding done notice).
- The optional imagePASS is installed.
- Any of the following settings are set from the Additional Functions screen:
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode].
2
Select [Low] or [High] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
Customizing Settings
4
[Low]:
Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is low, but it takes longer to
recover from the Sleep mode.
[High]:
Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is high, but it takes shorter to
recover from the Sleep mode.
NOTE
If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to 'Low', it may take more than 10
seconds for the touch panel to be displayed after pressing the control panel power
switch.
Distinguishing LTRR and STMT Originals
You can designate the way the machine handles LTRR and STMT originals that are
placed on the platen glass.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[LTRR/STMT Original Selection].
Select [Distinguish Manually], [Use LTRR Format], or [Use
STMT Format] ➞ press [OK].
If you select [Distinguish Manually], a screen enabling you to select the original
size appears when scanning.
If you select [Use LTRR Format], the machine detects the original as LTRR.
If you select [Use STMT Format], the machine detects the original as STMT.
4-38
Specifying Common Settings
Output Tray Designation
You can designate the machine's output trays to be used for specific functions.
The output trays indicated by Tray A, B, and C vary according to the attached
optional equipment.
Options Attached
Tray A/B/C
Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2
NOTE
The same output tray can be designated for multiple functions.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Tray
Designation].
Select the functions for which to designate output Trays A, B,
and C ➞ press [OK].
The optional Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached.
Prints from Remote Copy jobs are included in [Copy].
[Printer] appears only if the optional UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit or imagePASS is
available for use.
[Other] is used for designating a tray for printing reports.
Specifying Common Settings
4-39
Customizing Settings
4
[Receive/Fax] appears if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, and the
optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. If only the optional Universal Send Kit is
activated, [Receive] appears. If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is
installed, [Fax] appears.
If you want to use an output tray for only one function, select only that function.
IMPORTANT
If a certain tray reaches its stacking limit, the machine automatically uses another
tray that is designated for the same function. However, it is recommended that you
only designate one tray for fax/I-fax documents to prevent them from getting lost.
● If you want to select the tray home position (when the optional
Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached):
❑ Press the Tray Home Position drop-down list ➞ select the tray home position to
Customizing Settings
4
be used while jobs are being processed.
Tray Home Position
[Tray B]:
Tray B moves closer to the output area.
[Tray C]:
Tray C moves closer to the output area.
[Off]:
The tray home position is not set. The output tray stops at the
position it is in when printing finishes.
Setting the Printing Priority
You can set the machine's printing priority. A job that belongs to a function with a
higher set priority is printed after the job currently being processed is complete.
NOTE
Priority printing does not take place until the current job is complete. However, if the
current job is paused, the printing of a job that belongs to a function with a higher set
priority may start, depending on the settings.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Printing Priority].
2
Select the printing priority for the various functions ➞
press [OK].
If you select [1] for a function, that function is given the highest printing priority.
Prints from Remote Copy jobs are included in [Copy].
[Printer] appears only if the optional UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit or imagePASS is
available for use.
4-40
Specifying Common Settings
[Receive/Fax] appears if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, and the
optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. If only the optional Universal Send Kit is
activated, [Receive] appears. If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is
installed, [Fax] appears.
<Other> is used for setting the priority for printing reports.
PDL prints from MEAP applications are included in <Printer>. However, local
print jobs from MEAP applications are included in <Mail Box>.
NOTE
If the same printing priority has been specified for multiple functions, printing starts
with the first processed print job.
Image Form
IMPORTANT
• Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the
capacity of the hard disk.
• Be sure to place the original that contains the image form on the platen glass. It is not
possible to scan an image form from the feeder.
NOTE
Image forms can also be retrieved from a personal computer and stored in the machine.
Storing an Image Form
1
2
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Form for Form Composition].
Press [Register].
Select the size of the original that contains the image form ➞
press [Next].
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
Specifying Common Settings
4-41
4
Customizing Settings
You can store image forms and superimpose them on the output using the Form
Composition mode in the Copy and Mail Box functions. For instructions on using
the Form Composition mode, see Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box
Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.
4
Select [Entire Image Composition] or [Transparent Image] ➞
press [Next].
● If [Transparent Image] is selected:
4
Customizing Settings
❑ Press [-] or [+] to adjust the halftone density ➞ press [Next].
5
Set the desired scan settings.
If you want to change the zoom ratio, press [Copy Ratio]. (See Chapter 3, "Basic
Copying and Mail Box Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
If you want to change the scan exposure, press [ ] or [ ]. (See Chapter 3,
"Basic Copying and Mail Box Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
If you want to select the image quality for scanning, select the original type from
the original type drop-down list. (See Chapter 3, "Basic Copying and Mail Box
Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
If you want to invert images, adjust the contrast of images, or set the automatic
copy/scan exposure, press [Special Features], and then set each function. (See
Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box Features," in the Copying and Mail
Box Guide.)
If you want to assign a name to the image form, press [Form Name] ➞ enter a
name ➞ press [OK].
4-42
Specifying Common Settings
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
• If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the machine automatically
assigns the image form a name using the year, month, day, and time the image
form was stored.
6
Place the original that contains the image form on the platen
glass ➞ press
(Start).
NOTE
The following two types of icons appear on the screen:
- : Transparent Image
- : Entire Image Composition
Customizing Settings
4
Checking Image Form Details
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Form for Form Composition].
2
Select the desired image form ➞ press [Details].
NOTE
To check the image of the stored form, press [Check Print] ➞ select the paper size
➞ press [Start Print]. (See Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box Features," in
the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
3
Check the detailed information ➞ press [Done].
If you want to change the name of the image form, press [Change Form Name].
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
Specifying Common Settings
4-43
Erasing an Image Form
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Form for Form Composition].
2
Select the image form that you want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
NOTE
To check the image of the stored form, press [Check Print] ➞ select the paper size
➞ press [Start Print]. (See Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box Features," in
the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Customizing Settings
4
3
Press [Yes].
User-Defined Text for Page Numbers and Watermarks
You can register specific text to be placed on your documents using the Pg/Copy
Set Numbering, Print Watermark/Date, or [Watermark] for the Secure Watermark
mode. For instructions on using the Pg/Copy Set Numbering, Print Watermark/
Date, and Secure Watermark modes, see Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail
Box Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.
NOTE
The maximum number of user-defined text strings for watermarks and page numbers
that can be registered is 30.
Registering User-Defined Text
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Characters for Page No./Watermark].
2
Press [Register] ➞ enter the desired characters ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
3
4-44
Press [Done].
Specifying Common Settings
Editing User-Defined Text
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Characters for Page No./Watermark].
2
Select the text to edit ➞ press [Edit].
3
Enter the new text ➞ press [OK].
4
Press [Done].
Erasing User-Defined Text
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Characters for Page No./Watermark].
2
Select the text to erase ➞ press [Erase].
3
Press [Yes].
4
Press [Done].
Specifying Common Settings
4
Customizing Settings
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
4-45
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass
You can set the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses beforehand. This
setting is useful if you always load the same paper size and type into the stack
bypass.
If the Stack Bypass Standard Settings are stored when using the optional Fax
function, you can also use the stack bypass to receive faxes.
IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
4
Customizing Settings
NOTE
If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy, Mail Box, and Fax
(Receive) functions, you must select the stack bypass when specifying the Drawer
Eligibility for APS/ADS setting. (See "Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p.
4-31.)
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Stack Bypass Standard Settings].
2
Press [On] ➞ [Store].
If you press [Off], proceed to step 5.
3
Select the desired paper size.
● If you want to select a standard paper size:
❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
● If you want to select an nonstandard paper size:
❑ Press [Free Size].
❑ Press [Next].
4-46
Specifying Common Settings
4
Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [LTR] or [LTRR] is selected as the paper
size.
• For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-52.
• You can register a paper type that is not listed in [Detailed Settings] in the Stack
Bypass Settings: Selecting the Paper Type screen. For details on registering paper
types, see "Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types," on p. 6-67.
Press [OK].
Standard Local Print Settings
4
You can set the standard print settings for the machine. The Standard Local Print
Settings are used in the following cases:
• If
you print documents stored in inboxes without changing the print settings
you merge and print multiple documents stored in an inbox
• If you reset the settings before printing a document that has been sent from a
computer, or if you are using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function
and store these documents in an inbox
• If
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Standard Local Print Settings].
Select the desired standard local print settings for each mode
➞ press [Done].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Paper Select]: Select the paper source.
[Copies]: Set the number of copies from 1 to 9,999 sets.
[Finishing]: Set the type of collating.
[2-Sided Print]: Set whether to perform two-sided printing.
[Erase Document After Printing]: Set whether to erase a document from memory
after it prints.
[Merge Documents]: Set whether to merge documents, if you select multiple
documents that are stored in an inbox for printing.
Specifying Common Settings
4-47
Customizing Settings
5
Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel Display
You can select the language displayed on the touch panel display.
NOTE
• If Language Switch is set to 'On', some characters are restricted and cannot be entered.
To be able to enter all characters, set Language Switch to 'Off'.
• Even if Language Switch is set to 'On', there are some languages that cannot be
displayed.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Language Switch].
2
Press [On] ➞ select the desired language ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
4
If you do not want to change the display language, press [Off].
If you press [Display Shortcut Key], [ ] will be displayed next to [System
Monitor] on the Basic Features screen. [ ] is a shortcut key to the Language
Switch screen.
IMPORTANT
• Some messages may not be displayed properly in the language that you just
selected. In this case, restart the machine (turn the machine OFF, and then back
ON). For instructions on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then
ON) the machine, see "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on p. 1-16.
• If SSO is set as the login service, and there is a difference between the language
set on the machine and the one set in Active Directory, the sender's full name will
not be displayed in e-mail messages sent to the recipient.
4-48
Specifying Common Settings
Reversing the Contrast of the Touch Panel Display
You can reverse the contrast on the touch panel display for better viewing. The
Reversed Display mode reverses the light and dark areas on the touch panel
display. If you find it hard to read what is being shown on the touch panel display, try
using this mode.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Reversed Display (Color)].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
[On]:
The colors of the touch panel display screen are reversed (i.e., the areas
that are normally light become dark, and the dark areas become light).
[Off]:
The touch panel display screen returns to its default colors.
Alternating the Print Output (Offset Jobs)
The Offset Jobs mode automatically sorts the print output by job when multiple print
jobs are specified. It also ensures that output pages are always sorted even if you
forget to specify a finishing mode.
NOTE
[Offset Jobs] is displayed only if an optional finisher is attached.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Offset Jobs].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Common Settings
4-49
Customizing Settings
4
Details of each item are shown below.
Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Print Jobs
This mode enables you to insert blank pages before the first page of each print job
from a selected paper drawer. This is useful when you want to separate one print
job from another when printing multiple jobs.
IMPORTANT
If you are using the Booklet or Saddle Stitch mode, job separation sheets cannot be
inserted between jobs.
1
Customizing Settings
4
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Job
Separator between Jobs].
Select [On] or [Off].
● If you select [On]:
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper drawer containing the desired paper
size for the job separation sheet ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [OK].
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
4-50
Specifying Common Settings
Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Copy Sets
If you are using the Collate, Offset Collate, or Staple mode, you can insert blank
pages from a selected paper drawer to separate a specified number of copies.
IMPORTANT
If you are using the Do not Collate, Rotate Collate, Group, Offset Group, Booklet, or
Saddle Stitch mode, job separation sheets cannot be inserted between copy sets.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Job
Separator between Copies].
4
Select [On] or [Off].
● If you select [On]:
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper drawer containing the desired paper
size for the job separation sheet ➞ press [OK].
❑ Use
(numeric keys) to specify the number of pages after which a job
separation sheet will be inserted.
❑ Press [OK].
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
Specifying Common Settings
4-51
Customizing Settings
1
Job Duration Display
If the Job Duration Display mode is set to 'On', the remaining time that it takes to
complete an operation is displayed in minutes on the touch panel display.
NOTE
• The wait time is displayed as <Approx Prt Time> (approximate printing time) on the
screen that is displayed when the machine is printing.
• Even if Job Duration Display is set to 'On', the wait time is not displayed if the wait time is
less than one minute.
Customizing Settings
4
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Job
Duration Display].
2
Select [On] or [Off] for each function ➞ press [OK].
Storing Paper Sizes for the Paper Deck
You can store the paper sizes that you most frequently load into the optional Paper
Deck-AE1.
IMPORTANT
This mode is available only if the optional Paper Deck-AE1 is attached.
NOTE
If [Register Sizes for Side Paper Deck] is not displayed, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Register Sizes for Side Paper Deck].
2
Select the desired paper size ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
Make sure to load the same paper size that you stored in step 2 into the optional
Paper Deck-AE1. You may have to make adjustments to the paper deck. (See
"Changing the Paper Size for the Paper Deck-AE1," on p. 7-24.)
4-52
Specifying Common Settings
Setting an Output Tray to Hold Different Paper Sizes
This mode enables you to output different paper sizes to the same output tray.
IMPORTANT
This mode is available only if an optional finisher is attached.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray]
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Clean the Original Scanning Area Prompt
You can use the Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area mode to prompt
you to clean the scanning area when the machine detects streaks or stains. If the
feeder is not clean, the machine will scan and print dust and grime on the output.
The Clean the Original Scanning Area Prompt appears when originals are placed in
the feeder. For instructions on cleaning the feeder's scanning area, see "Cleaning
the Original Scanning Area," on p. 7-60.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Common Settings
4-53
Customizing Settings
4
NOTE
• If Different Size Originals is used with Staple mode, the prints are always stapled
regardless of the settings of Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray.
• Even if Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray is set to 'Off', different paper sizes
may be output to the same output tray if there is only a small amount of paper in the
paper tray.
Limiting Functions
If a problem frequently occurs when using the Finishing modes, such as Offset
Collate and Staple, you can temporarily limit the use of these finishing modes by
setting Limited Functions Mode to 'On'.
In addition, when the Service Call Message screen appears indicating a finishing
mode malfunction and you temporally set the Limited Functions Mode to clear the
Service Call Message screen, you can deactivate the Limited Functions Mode by
setting this mode to 'Off' from the Additional Functions screen. However, after the
Limited Functions Mode is deactivated, the Service Call Message screen may
appear again, unless the cause of the malfunction is cleared. (See "Setting the
Limited Functions Mode from the Service Call Message Screen," on p. 8-100.)
4
Customizing Settings
NOTE
[Limited Functions Mode] is displayed only if an optional finisher is attached.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Limited Functions Mode].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
The Limited Functions Mode is enabled only after you restart the machine (the
main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON). For instructions on restarting
(turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Main Power
and Control Panel Power," on p. 1-16.
Forcing to Output Excess Tab Paper
You can set whether to force to output excess tab paper that was not used for a
Copy or Print job that included tab taper. For more information on copying or
printing on tab paper, see Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box Features," in
the Copying and Mail Box Guide.
4-54
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Common Settings
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults
You can restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults (initial settings).
NOTE
• If you set Language Switch to 'On', and then return the Common Settings to their default
settings, Language Switch is turned 'Off', but the language shown on the touch panel
display remains unchanged. (See "Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel
Display," on p. 4-48.)
• If you set Limited Functions Mode to 'On', and then return the Common Settings to their
default settings, the setting for the Limited Functions Mode remains unchanged.
• Image forms registered for Register Form for Form Composition are not erased.
2
4
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞
[Initialize Common Settings].
Customizing Settings
1
Press [Yes].
Specifying Common Settings
4-55
Timer Settings
You can make various timer related settings for the machine, such as adjusting the
current time, and specifying the time it takes for the machine to enter into the Sleep
mode.
Current Time Adjustment
You can make adjustments to the current time. For instructions on setting the
current date and time, see "Current Date and Time," on p. 6-23.
Customizing Settings
4
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Time
Fine Adjustment].
2
Press [-] or [+] to adjust the current time ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
Even if you change the time from 00:00 to 23:59, or 23:59 to 00:00, the date will not
be changed.
Auto Sleep Time
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key
operation is performed), the control panel power switch automatically switches OFF
to save power. The machine has entered the Sleep mode.
NOTE
For more information on the Sleep mode, see "Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode,"
on p. 4-37.
4-56
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Auto
Sleep Time].
2
Press [▼] or [▲] to enter the desired Auto Sleep Time ➞ press
[OK].
Timer Settings
Auto Clear Time
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key
operation is performed), the display returns to the Basic Features screen (standard
settings) of the selected function. This period of time is called the "Auto Clear
Time."
NOTE
If '0' is selected, the Auto Clear Time mode is not set.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Auto
Clear Time].
Press [-] or [+] to enter the desired Auto Clear Time ➞
press [OK].
Time Until the Unit Quiets Down
If the machine is not in use (no keys are pressed, and no print jobs are being
processed) for a certain period of time, the machine enters the Quiet mode. While
in the Quiet mode, sounds emanating from the machine are reduced. You can
specify the amount of time that must elapse before the machine enters the Quiet
mode in one minute increments.
NOTE
If '0' is selected, the Quiet mode is not set.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞
[Time Until Unit Quiets Down].
2
Press [-] or [+] to specify the desired time period ➞
press [OK].
Timer Settings
4-57
4
Customizing Settings
1
Daily Timer Settings
You can set the time that the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode each
day of the week.
NOTE
If the Auto Sleep Time and Daily Timer modes are both set, the Auto Sleep Time setting
has priority.
Customizing Settings
4
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Daily
Timer Settings].
2
Select the day of the week ➞ enter the time using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits (including zeros) without a space.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, select the day of the week again ➞
enter another four digit number.
You can also press
4-58
Timer Settings
(Clear) to clear the incorrect values.
Adjusting the Machine
This section describes how you can make fine adjustments to the settings of the
machine, such as making a fine adjustment to the printed image and the saddle
stitch position.
It is recommended that you clean and adjust the machine regularly.
Zoom Fine Adjustment
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Zoom Fine Adjustment].
2
Press [-] or [+] to adjust the percentage (%) ➞ press [OK].
If you are making an adjustment to either the X (horizontal) or Y (vertical)
direction, press [-] or [+] to enter a value for that direction only.
Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning
You can reposition the stapler of the saddle stitcher unit after clearing a staple jam,
or after replacing the staple cartridge. Saddle stitch staple repositioning works by
feeding several sheets of paper into the saddle stitcher unit and stapling them
together.
IMPORTANT
• Only use 11" x 17", LGL, or LTRR paper for the saddle stitch staple repositioning
procedure.
• Make sure to remove all output booklets from the optional Booklet Tray before performing
the saddle stitch staple repositioning procedure.
Adjusting the Machine
4-59
4
Customizing Settings
When you print a copy or a document from an inbox, a slight difference in size may
occur between the size of the original image, and the size of the copied/printed
image. In this case, you can perform a fine adjustment to compensate for this
difference.
NOTE
• Saddle stitch staple repositioning can be performed only if the optional Saddle
Finisher-AD2 is attached.
• Paper that is required for the saddle stitch staple repositioning procedure is automatically
fed to the saddle stitcher unit by the machine.
1
2
Press [Start].
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment
Customizing Settings
4
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning].
If you are using the Saddle Stitch mode of the optional Saddle Finisher-AD2, and
you notice that the folds of the paper are not exactly in the middle of the booklet,
you can make adjustments to the saddle stitch position to compensate for this error.
NOTE
The saddle stitch position can only be adjusted if the optional Saddle Finisher-AD2 is
attached.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment].
Select the paper size for which you want to adjust the saddle
stitch position.
NOTE
Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be available in certain countries.
3
4-60
Press [▼] or [▲] to adjust the saddle stitch position ➞
press [OK].
Adjusting the Machine
Adjusting Creep (Displacement) Correction
This mode enables you to adjust the displacement of pages that occurs between
the outermost and center page when the Booklet mode is set.
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Creep (Displacement) Correction Adjustment].
2
Select the desired paper type ➞ press [Adjust].
3
Press [▼] or [▲] to adjust the correction width ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
Fold Placement Adjustment
You can adjust the folding positions of the paper when the C-Fold or Z-fold mode is
set.
NOTE
[Fold Placement Adjustment] is displayed only if the optional Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1 is attached to the optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2.
1
2
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Fold Placement Adjustment].
Press [C-Fold Placement Adjustment] or [Z-Fold Placement
Adjustment].
Press [▼] or [▲] to adjust the folding positions ➞ press [OK].
If you selected [C-Fold Placement Adjustment], adjust the two folding positions
(A and B).
Adjusting the Machine
4-61
4
Customizing Settings
1
Exposure Recalibration
You can recalibrate the exposure adjustment scale if differences between the image
on the original and the print occur.
1
2
Customizing Settings
4
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Exposure Recalibration].
Press [Light] or [Dark] for each function to adjust the
exposure ➞ press [OK].
Character/Background Contrast Adjustment
This mode enables you to adjust the relative contrast (brightness) of the hidden text
and the background when using the Secure Watermark mode. For more
information on the Secure Watermark mode, see Chapter 4, "Special Copying and
Mail Box Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.
IMPORTANT
Load LTR or 11" x 17" size regular or heavy paper when making sample prints.
NOTE
[Character/Background Contrast Adjustment] is displayed only if the optional Secure
Watermark is activated.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Character/Background Contrast Adjustment].
You can adjust the relative contrast (brightness) of the hidden text and the
background when using the Secure Watermark mode.
4-62
Adjusting the Machine
Press [Sample Print] ➞ press [Yes] to make sample print.
The setting range for the Relative Contrast Value will differ, depending on the
Standard Value Settings you have set.
Standard Value Settings
Relative Contrast Value
0
0 to +7
4
-4 to +7
8 to 54
-7 to +7
60
-7 to +4
64
-7 to 0
4
Customizing Settings
2
NOTE
• If adjusting the contrast of the background and characters (latent image), specify
the relative contrast value.
• The area within the frame on the sample print is the output sample for the currently
set relative contrast value.
● If you want to specify print settings for the sample print:
❑ Press [Sample Print Settings] ➞ specify the desired settings ➞ press [OK].
You can set the background pattern, text size, and orientation.
Adjusting the Machine
4-63
NOTE
Print settings cannot be set from [Secure Watermark] in the Special Features
screen of the Copy or Mail Box function.
3
Refer to the sample print and set the contrast value indicated
for an image where the hidden text is difficult to see using [▼]
or [▲].
● If there is no image where the text is difficult to see:
❑ Press [Standard Value Settings] ➞ [Sample Print] ➞ [Yes].
Customizing Settings
4
❑ Refer to the standard value sample print and set the standard value indicated
for the image which has the most even contrast for the inner and outer squares.
❑ Press [OK] ➞ return to step 2.
NOTE
When changing the adjustment area on the sample print for the relative contrast,
specify settings for [Standard Value Settings].
● If you want to adjust the density of the text:
❑ Press [Latent String Density] ➞ adjust the density using [-] or [+].
❑ Press [OK] ➞ return to step 2.
NOTE
When adjusting the density of the characters (latent image), specify settings for
[Latent String Density].
4-64
Adjusting the Machine
4
Press [OK].
The more even the contrast between the hidden text and the background is, the
harder it will be to see the hidden text on the original, but the less the hidden text
will appear when it is copied. It is recommended you make a copy of the original
after adjusting the contrast to confirm that the secure watermark becomes visible
as desired.
NOTE
The contents of the settings changed in [Character/Background Contrast
Adjustment] are retained until the next time the settings are changed.
Automatic Feeder Cleaning
NOTE
It takes approximately 15 seconds to clean the feeder.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Feeder Cleaning].
2
Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder ➞ press [Start].
Make sure that you fan the sheets of paper well.
Use plan LTR paper.
When cleaning is complete, try scanning again.
NOTE
To cancel feeder cleaning while it is in progress, press [Cancel].
Adjusting the Machine
4-65
4
Customizing Settings
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the
feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder.
Wire Cleaning
If streaks appear on printed output, or random parts of the printed image are
missing, clean the corona assembly wires inside the main unit.
NOTE
• It takes approximately 35 seconds to clean the wires.
• Wire cleaning cannot be performed during printing.
• The machine may clean the wires automatically if it detects that the wires are dirty.
1
Customizing Settings
4
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Wire Cleaning].
Press [Start].
When cleaning is complete, try printing again.
Drum Cleaning
If you use the machine immediately after installation, or if the machine is not used
for a long period of time, such as during a holiday, there may be rare cases in which
the images printed become light or distorted. If the images printed are light or
distorted, clean the drum as necessary.
NOTE
• It takes approximately 5 minutes to clean the drum.
• Drum cleaning cannot be performed during printing.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Drum Cleaning].
Press [Start].
NOTE
If you do not want to perform cleaning, press [Cancel].
4-66
Adjusting the Machine
Displaying the Procedure for Cleaning the Original
Scanning Area
If originals are scanned using the feeder, there may be some cases in which the
original cannot be scanned properly, or streaks appear on the output. In this case,
clean the original scanning area of the feeder by following the directions displayed
in Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the
Additional Functions screen).
NOTE
For more information, see "Cleaning the Original Scanning Area," on p. 7-60.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method].
Follow the instruction on the screen to clean the original
scanning area.
Press [Done] if you do not want to clean the original scanning area.
Adjusting the Machine
4-67
4
Customizing Settings
1
Customizing Settings
4
4-68
Adjusting the Machine
Checking Job and Device
Status
5
CHAPTER
This chapter explains how to check the counter, and how to use the System Monitor screen to
change or check the status of print and copy jobs.
Checking the Counter and Controller Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Checking Job Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Checking Job Status from the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Checking Job Status from the Print Job Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Checking Copy/Print Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Printing the Copy/Print Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the System Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the Print Job Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
5-1
Checking the Counter and Controller Version
You can check the copy and print page counts, and the print and scan page counts
that are performed by users who log on to MEAP applications using a login service.
You can also check the version of controller.
1
Press
(Counter Check) on the control panel.
3
MNO
5
Counter
Check
Checking Job and Device Status
6
WXYZ
Stop
9
Start
The various counts are shown on the touch panel display.
2
Check the Send/Fax counter, MEAP counter, or controller
version.
● To check the Send/Fax counter:
❑ Press [Send/Fax Cntr Check].
[Send/Fax Cntr Check] appears if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated,
and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
[Send Counter Check] appears if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated,
but the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed.
[Fax Counter Check] appears if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed,
but the optional Universal Send Kit is not activated.
❑ Press [Done].
● To check the MEAP counter:
❑ Press [MEAP Counter].
❑ Press the Application Name drop-down list ➞ select the desired application.
To check the version information of an application, the MEAP Contents version
information, etc., press [Version Information].
5-2
Checking the Counter and Controller Version
❑ Press [Done].
● To check the controller version:
❑ Press [Device Configuration].
❑ Press [Done].
Press [Done].
5
Checking Job and Device Status
3
Checking the Counter and Controller Version
5-3
Checking Job Status
If you press [System Monitor], the System Monitor screen appears, enabling you to
check and change the status of Copy, Send, Fax, Print, and Receive jobs. For
example, you can change the order of jobs in the print queue, cancel a job, or check
the details of a job.
By displaying the status for each job type, it is possible to check the current job or a
job waiting to be processed. By displaying the Log, you can view all of the
completed jobs or confirm that a job has been processed. It is also possible to print
a fax transmissions/receptions report from the System Monitor screen.
Press [Print Jobs] to confirm or edit print jobs on the Print Job screen.
5
Checking Job and Device Status
From the System Monitor screen, it is possible to quickly acquire information about
the machine, check the amount of paper remaining in all of the standard and
optional paper sources, check the available system memory, and the status of
consumables. You can also view a list of error messages.
5-4
Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status
5-5
5
Checking Job and Device Status
NOTE
• If Department ID Management or a login service (such as SSO or SDL) is set and
Display Status Before Authentication in System Monitor Screen Restriction in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', operations other than
displaying the Device Status screen cannot be performed from the System Monitor
screen before logging in to the machine. (See "Restricting Access to the System Monitor
Screen," on p. 6-30.)
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', the following items are not displayed:
- On the System Monitor screen:
<Activity Report (RX)>, [Details], and [Print List] on the Receive screen
Copy, Send, Fax, and Print job logs
- On the Print Job screen:
[Log]
• For information on the operations that can be performed on printer jobs using the Print
function, see the PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Guide.
• Many of the check/change operations can also be performed from the Remote User
Interface. (See Chapter 2, "Checking and Managing Functions," in the Remote UI
Guide.)
• The status bars on the keys located on the bottom of the System Monitor screen, flash in
red or green to indicate the status of jobs. The status bars flash green when there are
current jobs that are being processed, and maintain a steady green light when there are
jobs in the print queue. Flashing red status bars indicate errors. For instructions on
resolving errors, see Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting."
• The Send function is available only if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated.
• The Fax function is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
• The Printer function is available only if the optional UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit or
imagePASS is available for use.
Checking Job Status from the System Monitor Screen
1
2
Checking Job and Device Status
5
Press [System Monitor].
From the keys located at the bottom of the System Monitor
screen, select the job type that you want to check or change,
or press [Device] to display the current status of the machine.
● If a job type ([Copy], [Send], [Fax], [Print], or [Receive]) is selected:
❑ Press [Status] to check the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be
processed.
The example above shows the screen that is displayed when [Print] is
selected.
If [Fax] is selected, press [Send Job Status] or [Received Job Status] instead.
If [Receive] is selected, press [Forwarding Status].
NOTE
For instructions on checking the status of Send, Fax, or Receive jobs, see Chapter
8, "Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status," in the Sending and Facsimile
Guide.
5-6
Checking Job Status
❑ Press [Log] to check the jobs that have already been processed.
The log is organized according to the type of job. Press the Select Type
drop-down list ➞ select the type of job whose log you want to check.
If you select [RX Print] from the Select Type drop-down list, the log for all
receive jobs is displayed in chronological order.
NOTE
• The status of Receive jobs can only be confirmed by the log.
• The table below describes the icons that are displayed on the status and log
screens.
Checking Job and Device Status
Icon (Job Status)
5
Description
Executing
Waiting
Error
Canceling
Paused
Secured Print
Sent
Icon (Job Type)
Description
Copy Job
Send/Fax Job
Mail Box Job
Print Job
Report Print Job
• The most recent 100 copy, fax, or print jobs, and a total of the most recent 100
send and receive jobs are displayed in the log.
Checking Job Status
5-7
● If [Device] is selected:
❑ Check the current machine status.
The status of the
device and the current
job are displayed here.
This area displays
recovery procedures
for problems, such as
clearing a paper jam or
replacing the toner and
staple cartridges.
The remaining amount of available system
memory is displayed in percentage, and the
status of consumables are displayed.
The remaining amount of paper, the paper type, and
paper size loaded in the paper sources are displayed.
❑ Press [Consumables] to display the remaining amount of toner and staples.
Checking Job and Device Status
5
❑ When you are finished checking the status of the consumables, press [Done].
NOTE
All displays are approximations of the actual amount of consumables remaining.
3
Press [Done].
Checking Job Status from the Print Job Screen
1
5-8
Press [Print Job].
Checking Job Status
Check the status of the print jobs.
❑ Press [Status] to check the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be
processed.
NOTE
If you are using a login service, [My Job Status] is displayed. Press this key to
display only the jobs for the user that is currently logged on to the machine.
5
❑ Press [Log] to check the jobs that have already been processed.
Checking Job and Device Status
2
❑ Press the Select Type drop-down list ➞ select the type of job whose log you
want to check.
NOTE
For information on the displayed icons, see "Checking Job Status from the System
Monitor Screen," on p. 5-6.
Checking Job Status
5-9
Job Details
You can check the details of copy and print jobs, such as the date and time the
machine received and processed the jobs, and the number of pages.
NOTE
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', the following items are not displayed on the System Monitor screen:
- On the System Monitor screen:
<Activity Report (RX)>, [Details], and [Print List] on the Receive screen
Copy, Send, Fax, and Print job logs
- On the Print Job screen:
[Log]
• For information on the operations that can be performed on printer jobs using the Print
function, see the PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Guide.
• Only operations for print jobs can be performed on the Print Job screen.
Checking Job and Device Status
5
Checking Copy/Print Job Details
Checking Copy/Print Job Details from the System Monitor Screen
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ select the job type ([Copy] or
[Print]).
IMPORTANT
To check the details of jobs specified through a MEAP application, select [Print] for
both MEAP copy and print jobs.
5-10
Job Details
2
Press [Status] or [Log] ➞ select the job whose details you
want to check ➞ press [Details].
3
Check the detailed information ➞ press [Done] repeatedly
until the Basic Features screen appears.
5
1
Checking Job and Device Status
Checking Copy/Print Job Details from the Print Job Screen
Press [Print Job].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Job Status from the
System Monitor Screen," on p. 5-6.
2
Press [Status] or [Log] ➞ select the job whose details you
want to check ➞ press [Details].
3
Check the detailed information ➞ press [Done] repeatedly
until the Basic Features screen appears.
Job Details
5-11
Printing the Copy/Print Log
Printing Copy/Print Log from the System Monitor Screen
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ select the job type ([Copy] or
[Print]).
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Job Status from the
System Monitor Screen," on p. 5-6.
2
Press [Log] ➞ [Print List].
Checking Job and Device Status
5
If you selected [Print], press the Select Type drop-down list ➞ select the type of
job whose log you want to print ➞ press [Print List].
NOTE
The log can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain, recycled, or
color paper) is loaded in one of the paper sources that are set to 'On' when you
press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Auto Paper
Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 4-31.)
3
Press [Yes].
If you selected [Copy], the Copy Log List is printed. If you selected [Print], the Print
Log List is printed.
4
Press [Done].
NOTE
For samples of the Copy and Print Logs, see "Sample Reports," on p. 9-2.
5-12
Job Details
Printing the Copy/Print Log from the Print Job Screen
1
Press [Print Job] ➞ [Log].
2
Press the Select Type drop-down list ➞ select the type of job
whose log you want to print ➞ press [Print List].
3
Checking Job and Device Status
5
Press [Yes].
Job Details
5-13
Priority Printing
You can change the printing priority of a job, so that it is printed right after the
current job is complete.
Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the System
Monitor Screen
Checking Job and Device Status
5
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Print].
2
Press [Status] ➞ select the job for priority printing ➞ press
[Print Next].
3
5-14
Press [Done].
Priority Printing
Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the Print Job
Screen
1
Press [Print Job] ➞ [Status].
2
Select the job for priority printing ➞ press [Print Next].
Checking Job and Device Status
5
Priority Printing
5-15
Checking Job and Device Status
5
5-16
Priority Printing
System Manager Settings
6
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the settings that can be made by the person in charge of the machine's
operation, such as the System Manager.
Specifying the System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Changing the Password and Page Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Erasing the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Clearing the Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Auto Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Auto Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Auto Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
License Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Copy Set Numbering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Setting System Monitor Screen Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Restricting Access to the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Setting to Allow Secured Printing from the System Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Setting to Display Job Logs from the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
MEAP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Use HTTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Printing Installed Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Registering/Deleting/Printing Delivery Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Setting Automatic Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Setting Manual Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
6-1
6. System Manager Settings
Restricting the Reception of Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Restoring Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Restricting the Type of Information That Is Updated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Checking/Printing the Communication Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Initializing All Data/Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Displaying the Current Department ID/User Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Specifying Encrypted Secured Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Setting to Receive Only Encrypted Secured Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Using a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Using a USB Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Setting the Display Method When Entering a Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6
Forced Secure Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
System Manager Settings
Printer Driver Secure Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Storing Irregular Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Editing Irregular Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Erasing Irregular Paper Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
PDL Selection (PnP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Specifying Settings for All User Inboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Setting the Time until Documents Are Automatically Erased . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Printing upon Storing from the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Restricting Printer Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6-2
Specifying the System Manager Settings
You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. Once the System
Manager ID/password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the
System Settings.
NOTE
• If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, the numbers 1 to 1,000 cannot be used for
the System Manager ID. Numbers 1 to 1,000 are reserved for control cards by default.
• For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch Panel
Display," on p. 2-24.
• The maximum number of digits that you can store for the System Manager ID and
System Password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the
machine stores them with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[System Manager Settings].
Specifying the System Manager Settings
6-3
6
System Manager Settings
IMPORTANT
• Attaching the optional Card Reader-C1 erases the System Manager ID and System
Password that have been stored.
• Depending on the login service being used, if Department ID Management is set to 'Off'
and a System Manager ID or password is not specified, all users of the machine may be
considered as the Administrator even without authentication.
• If you are performing user authentication using the SDL or SSO login service, the System
Settings mode is restricted in the following way:
- Users registered as a general user cannot change the System Settings, regardless of
the System Manager ID setting.
- Users registered as an Administrator can change the System Settings by entering the
correct System Manager ID and System Password or registering them in their user data
in advance.
2
Specify the desired settings ➞ press [OK].
[System Manager ID]:
Press [System Manager ID] ➞ enter a number (up to seven digits) using
(numeric keys).
-
You must set a System Manager ID in order to manage the operations of the
machine.
[System Password]:
Press [System Password] ➞ [Password] ➞ enter a number (up to seven digits) ➞
press [Confirm] ➞ enter same number to confirm the password ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
6
You cannot store a System Manager ID or System Password with only zeros as
the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros,
the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
[System Manager]:
Press [System Manager] ➞ enter the System Manager's name ➞ press [OK].
[E-mail Address]:
Press [E-mail Address] ➞ enter the System Manager's e-mail address ➞ press
[OK].
[Contact Information]:
Press [Contact Information] ➞ enter the contact information for the System
Manager ➞ press [OK].
[Comment]:
Press [Comment] ➞ enter any comment for the System Manager ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number or character, press
(Clear) to
clear your entry.
• If Asterisks for Entering Access No./Passwords in Use Asterisks to Enter Access
No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', passwords you enter are not displayed as asterisks (********). (See "Setting
the Display Method When Entering a Password," on p. 6-59.)
6-4
Specifying the System Manager Settings
Department ID Management
You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage
the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID
and password. This is called Department ID Management. Department IDs and
passwords for up to 1,000 departments can be registered. Use Department ID
Management to keep track of the copy, scan, and print totals for each department.
With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:
• Turn
Department ID Management
6-5
6
System Manager Settings
Department ID Management 'On' or 'Off'.
• Register the Department ID and password.
• Set page limits for scans, prints, and copies.
• Set whether to use Department ID Management for the Mail Box, Send, Fax, and
Network Scan functions. If the Copy function is specified, it is automatically
restricted when Department ID Management is set.
• Set up copy, scan, and print restrictions.
IMPORTANT
• If SDL or SSO is set as the login service, Department ID Management is performed on
the Department ID that shares the same user name and password as the one registered
for MEAP User Authentication.
• If you are using SSO and set Department ID Management to 'On', you may not be able to
log on. In this case, change the login service to Default Authentication, and then set
Department ID Management to 'Off'. For instructions on setting a login service, see
Chapter 4, "MEAP System Management," in the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.
• If the optional Card Reader is attached, and SDL or Default Authentication is set as the
login service, Department ID Management is automatically activated. (See "Card
Reader-C1," on p. 3-31.)
• Optional imageWARE Accounting Manager software is necessary to use the Domain
Authentication system of SSO (including when performing domain authentication with the
'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' system) and Department ID
Management simultaneously. If imageWARE Accounting Manager is not installed, and
SSO is set as the login service, make sure that Department ID Management is set to
'Off'. Otherwise, you will not be able to log on.
• The user information registered for SDL or the Local Device Authentication system of
SSO, and the registered Department ID and password set for Department ID
Management must match. If the registered Department ID and password have been
changed because information was updated or changed by the Device Information
Delivery Settings mode, make sure that you change/update the user information
registered for SDL or the Local Device Authentication system of SSO accordingly. For
instructions on registering SDL or SSO user information, see the MEAP SMS
Administrator Guide.
• If SDL or SSO is set as the login service, the Limit Functions mode will not be available.
System Manager Settings
6
NOTE
• The maximum number of digits that you can store for the Department ID and password is
seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them
with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
• Other than using Department ID Management, this machine enables you to manage user
information using SDL or SSO.
6-6
Department ID Management
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
2
Press [On] ➞ [Register Dept. ID/Password].
If you do not want to store a Department ID, password, or page limit restriction,
proceed to step 10.
3
Press [Register].
Department ID Management
6-7
6
System Manager Settings
1
4
Use
(numeric keys) to enter the Department ID and
password.
❑ Press [Dept. ID] ➞ enter the Department ID.
❑ Press [Password].
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the desired password.
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ enter the same number to confirm the password ➞ press
[OK].
6
System Manager Settings
You cannot register a Department ID or password with only zeros as the
number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the
leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
(Clear) to clear the entire
number ➞ enter the correct number.
• If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the
Department ID.
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', passwords you enter are not displayed
as asterisks (********). (See "Setting the Display Method When Entering a
Password," on p. 6-59.)
5
Press [Turn Limits On/Off and Set Page Limits].
6
Set the page limits.
❑ Press [On] under the desired function(s).
If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under
the desired function's name.
NOTE
<Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Copy Limit> and <Print Limit>.
6-8
Department ID Management
❑ Press [
] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) ➞ enter the
page limit restriction using
(numeric keys).
IMPORTANT
• The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a
document either from memory or directly to the recipient.
• The machine stops scanning if a scan limit is reached while the machine is
scanning originals that are being fed from the feeder. (Those originals that were
scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
(Clear) to clear the
number ➞ enter the correct number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached,
copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print
is counted as two pages.
❑ Press [OK] ➞ [OK].
7
System Manager Settings
6
If you would like to limit users to certain functions of the
machine, press [Limit Functions].
Department ID Management
6-9
8
Select [On] or [Off] next to the functions (other than the Copy
function) you want to limit using Department ID Management
➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
Department ID Management is set for the selected function(s).
[Off]:
Department ID Management is set only for copying and printing
operations from computers.
[Send] appears if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional
Super G3 FAX Board is installed, or if only the optional Universal Send Kit is
activated. If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, [Fax] appears.
9
Press [Done].
10
Press [OK].
System Manager Settings
6
NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.
Changing the Password and Page Limit
You can change the password and page limit settings that you have registered.
6-10
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
2
Press [On] ➞ [Register Dept. ID/Password].
Department ID Management
3
Press [▼] or [▲] to display the department whose password
you want to change ➞ select the department ➞ press [Edit].
NOTE
Press and hold down [▼] or [▲] to quickly and continuously scroll through the
available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large
number of Department IDs are registered.
6
Enter the new password (up to seven digits) using
(numeric keys).
❑ Press [Password].
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the desired password.
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ enter the same number to confirm the password ➞ press
[OK].
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros
are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
(Clear) to clear the
password ➞ enter the correct password.
• You cannot change the Department ID.
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', passwords you enter are not displayed
as asterisks (********). (See "Setting the Display Method When Entering a
Password," on p. 6-59.)
5
If you want to change or set a page limit restriction, press
[Turn Limits On/Off and Set Page Limits].
Department ID Management
6-11
System Manager Settings
4
6
Change the page limit restriction, if necessary.
❑ Press [On] under the desired function(s).
❑ Press [
] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) ➞ enter the
page limit restriction using
(numeric keys).
❑ Press [OK] ➞ [OK].
If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under
the desired function's name.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
(Clear) to clear the
number ➞ enter the correct number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached,
copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print
is counted as two pages.
7
System Manager Settings
6
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.
Erasing the Department ID and Password
You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered.
NOTE
If Department ID Management is activated through the optional Card Reader-C1, you
cannot delete the Department ID.
6-12
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
2
Press [On] ➞ [Register Dept. ID/Password].
Department ID Management
3
Press [▼] or [▲] to display the Department ID that you want to
erase ➞ select the Department ID ➞ press [Erase].
NOTE
Press and hold down [▼] or [▲] to quickly and continuously scroll through the
available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large
number of Department IDs are registered.
Press [Yes].
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
6
NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.
Department ID Management
6-13
System Manager Settings
4
Checking and Printing Counter Information
You can display and print a list of how much paper was used by each department.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
2
Press [On] ➞ [Page Totals].
3
Check or print the page total count.
System Manager Settings
6
The page totals that belong to print jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are
the number of prints from computers that do not correspond with a registered
Department ID. These prints are referred to as prints with unknown IDs.
The page totals that belong to scan jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are
the number of pages that have been scanned from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID. These scanned pages from
computers are referred to as network scans with unknown IDs.
● If you only want to check the counter information:
❑ Press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired Department ID ➞ view the desired page
totals.
NOTE
Press and hold down [▼] or [▲] to quickly and continuously scroll through the
available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large
number of Department IDs are registered.
● If you want to print the displayed list:
❑ Press [Print List].
❑ Press [Yes].
6-14
Department ID Management
NOTE
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• To close the screen that is displayed while the machine is printing the Page Count
List, press [Done].
• The counter information can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you
press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Auto Paper
Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 4-31.)
4
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.
Clearing Page Totals
You can clear the page totals for all departments or for specific departments.
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
2
Press [On] ➞ [Page Totals].
If necessary, see the screen shot is step 2 of "Checking and Printing Counter
Information," on p. 6-14.
3
Press [Clear All Totals].
To clear one page total at a time by department, press [▼] or [▲] to display the
desired department ➞ select the department ➞ press [Clear].
4
Press [Yes].
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.
Department ID Management
6-15
System Manager Settings
1
6
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs
You can specify whether to accept or reject print and network scan jobs from
computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
NOTE
<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is displayed only if the machine is equipped with
the Printer function.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Dept. ID Management].
2
Press [On].
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
6
Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs
[On]:
The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond
with a registered Department ID.
[Off]:
The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID
Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs
[On]:
The machine accepts network scan jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID.
[Off]:
The machine does not accept network scan jobs from computers that do
not correspond with a registered Department ID.
NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.
6-16
Department ID Management
Remote UI
You can set whether to enable the Remote UI (User Interface) to operate the
machine and change settings.
NOTE
For more information on the Remote UI, see the Remote UI Guide.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Remote UI].
Select [On] or [Off].
6
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
Settings can be specified and the machine can be operated through the
Remote UI.
[Off]:
Settings cannot be specified and the machine cannot be operated
through the Remote UI.
● If you select [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL> ➞ press [OK].
Use SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
[On]:
SSL is used to communicate.
[Off]:
SSL is not used to communicate.
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
Remote UI
6-17
System Manager Settings
1
NOTE
• Before setting <Use SSL> to 'On', it is necessary to set a default key in Network
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP
Network," in the Network Guide.)
• The Remote UI is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power
switch is turned OFF, and then back ON). For instructions on restarting (turning the
main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Main Power and Control
Panel Power," on p. 1-16.
• Any changes made to <Use SSL> are also applied to <Use SSL> in <Use HTTP>
in MEAP Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
System Manager Settings
6
6-18
Remote UI
Device Information Settings
Device Information Settings enables you to set a name for the machine, and enter
information regarding its location.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Settings].
Enter the name and location of the machine.
❑ Press [Device Name] ➞ enter the name of the machine ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Location] ➞ enter the place where the machine is located ➞
press [OK].
6
❑ Press [OK].
System Manager Settings
1
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
Device Information Settings
6-19
Clearing the Message Board
The Message Board is a function used by the System Manager to display
messages for users on the touch panel display. Message board settings are made
from the Remote UI, but can be cleared from the main unit.
NOTE
For instructions on creating messages using the Remote UI, see Chapter 3,
"Customizing Settings," in the Remote UI Guide.
1
6
System Manager Settings
2
6-20
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Clear Message Board].
Press [Yes].
Clearing the Message Board
Auto Online/Offline
To use the optional Network Scan function, the machine must be connected to a
network, and must be separately switched online to the network. This section
explains how to switch the machine online and offline to use the Network Scan
function.
NOTE
For more information on the Network Scan function, see the Network ScanGear User's
Guide.
Auto Online
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Auto Online/Offline] ➞ [Auto Online].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Auto Offline
If the machine is connected to a network that is online, scanning is not possible with
the Copy or Mail Box function. By setting Auto Offline to 'On', the machine
automatically goes offline when the Auto Clear mode initiates.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Auto Online/Offline] ➞ [Auto Offline].
Auto Online/Offline
6
System Manager Settings
If Auto Online is set to 'On', the machine automatically goes online when you press
[Scan] on the Basic Features screen.
6-21
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If Auto Offline is set to 'On', the machine automatically goes offline once the Auto
Clear mode initiates. If the Auto Clear mode is not set (the Auto Clear Time is set to
'0'), the machine automatically goes offline after approximately two minutes. (See
"Auto Clear Time," on p. 4-57.)
System Manager Settings
6
6-22
Auto Online/Offline
Current Date and Time
Setting the current date and time is very important. The current date and time
settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.
The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is
called GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).
• Time Zone:
The standard time zones of the world are expressed
globally in terms of the difference in hours ( up to 12
hours) from GMT ( 0 hours). A time zone is a region
throughout which this time difference is the same.
• Daylight Saving Time: In some countries, time is advanced throughout the
summer season. The period in which this is applied is
called "Daylight Saving Time."
6
NOTE
You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the
network from the Additional Functions screen. (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP
Network," in the Network Guide.)
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Date
& Time Settings].
Enter the current date (month, day, year) and time using
(numeric keys).
Enter the month and the day using four digits (including zeros).
Current Date and Time
6-23
System Manager Settings
• GMT:
Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits
(including zeros) without a space.
Examples: May 6
7:05 a.m.
➞ 0506
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press
again, starting with the month.
(Clear) ➞ enter the values
● If you are setting the Time Zone:
❑ Press the Time Zone drop-down list ➞ select the time zone in which the
machine is located.
● If you are setting Daylight Saving Time:
❑ Press [On] ➞ [Start Date].
❑ Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists,
6
System Manager Settings
respectively.
❑ Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take
effect ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [End Date] ➞ select the month, day, and time at which Daylight Saving
Time ends ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time
of the machine one hour forward at the specified date and time.
3
6-24
Press [OK].
Current Date and Time
License Registration
You must register a license key to enable optional modes and functions.
Each optional mode and function requires their own license key to be registered.
There is no limit to the number of license keys that can be registered in the
machine.
IMPORTANT
Some optional modes and functions require optional equipment to be installed in addition
to obtaining and registering a license key. For more information, see "System Options,"
on p. 3-5, and "Available Combination of Options," on p. 3-8.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[License Registration].
License Registration
6-25
6
System Manager Settings
NOTE
A license key can be obtained via a Web browser to access the license management
system. Access the system by entering the following URL: http://www.canon.com/lms/
license/. For more information on obtaining the license key, see the License Access
Number Certificate and the License Registration Booklet included with the various
optional kits.
2
Enter the license key using
[Start].
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press
Details of each item are shown below.
[ ][ ]:
Press to move the cursor to the desired position.
[Backspace]:
Press to delete the last number entered.
If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] ➞ enter the correct license key.
System Manager Settings
6
If the following screen is displayed, the required optional equipment needed for
license registration has not been installed. Press [OK] ➞ install the required
optional equipment or make sure that the required optional equipment is installed
properly ➞ try registering the license key again.
6-26
License Registration
Press [OK].
6
System Manager Settings
3
License Registration
6-27
Copy Set Numbering Options
You can specify the detailed settings of the Copy Set Numbering mode for both the
Copying and Mail Box functions. For instructions on using the Copy Set Numbering
mode, see Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box Features," in the Copying and
Mail Box Guide.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Copy
Set Numbering Option Settings].
Select [On] or [Off] for <Copy Set Num. Op>.
Details of each item are shown below.
System Manager Settings
6
6-28
[On]:
[Full Surface] and [Numbers in 5 Locations] are grayed out, and cannot
be selected on the Orientation and Position Settings screen when you set
the Copy Set Numbering mode. The font sizes of the copy set numbers
are as follows: [Small]: 10.5 point, [Medium]: 12 point, [Large]: 14 point
[Off]:
[Full Surface] and [Numbers in 5 Locations] can be selected on the
Orientation and Position Settings screen when you set the Copy Set
Numbering mode. The font sizes of the copy set numbers are as follows:
[Small]: 12 point, [Medium]: 24 point, [Large]: 36 point
Copy Set Numbering Options
● If you select [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for each of the items ➞ press [Next].
ID/User Name
[On]:
The Department ID is printed. If you are using a login service other
than Department ID Management, the user name is printed instead.
[Off]:
Only the user name is printed.
Date
The date is printed.
[Off]:
The date is not printed.
6
Characters
[On]:
User-defined text is printed.
[Off]:
User-defined text is not printed.
❑ If you select [On] for <Date>, select the date format ➞ press [Next].
If you select [Off] for <Date>, proceed to the next step.
❑ If you select [On] for <Characters>, press [Enter] ➞ enter the text to print ➞
press [OK] ➞ [Next].
If you select [Off] for <Characters>, proceed to the next step.
If you have registered characters in Register Characters for Page No./
Watermark in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), you
can select the characters from the list.
❑ Select the way you would like to align the selected or entered characters on the
page ➞ press [OK].
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
Copy Set Numbering Options
6-29
System Manager Settings
[On]:
Setting System Monitor Screen Restrictions
You can set restrictions relating to the System Monitor screen.
Restricting Access to the System Monitor Screen
If you are using a login service, you can restrict access to the System Monitor
screen.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[System Monitor Screen Restriction] ➞ [Display Status Before
Authentication].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
6
If the Display Status Before Authentication mode is set to 'Off':
: Displayed
: Not Displayed
Department ID
Management or Log in
Service, such as SSO
and SDL
The System Monitor Screen
Print, Copy, Send, Fax,
and Receive Status
Screens
Device Status Screen
Before Logging In
After Logging In
IMPORTANT
Even if you set the Display Status Before Authentication mode to 'Off', access to
the System Monitor screen is only restricted if a login service is set.
6-30
Setting System Monitor Screen Restrictions
Setting to Allow Secured Printing from the System Monitor
Screen
You can set whether to allow secured printing from the System Monitor screen.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[System Monitor Screen Restriction] ➞ [Allow Secured Print
from Print Status Screen].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Setting to Display Job Logs from the System Monitor
Screen
6
1
Press
➞ [System Settings] ➞ [System Monitor Screen
Restriction] ➞ [Job Log Display].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
You can set whether to display job logs from the System Monitor screen.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
Job logs are displayed.
[Off]:
Job logs are not displayed.
If [Off] is selected, the following items are not displayed/cannot be selected.
- On the System Monitor screen:
[Details] and [Print List] on the Receive screen
[Log] on the Copy, Send, Fax, and Print screens
- On the Print Job screen:
[Log]
● If you select [On]:
❑ Press [OK].
Setting System Monitor Screen Restrictions
6-31
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Select [Allow] or [Do Not Allow] for <Obtain Job Log From Management
Software> ➞ press [OK].
Obtain Job Log From Management Software
[Allow]:
Permits collection of job logs using management software.
[Do Not Allow]:
Does not permit collection of job logs using management
software.
System Manager Settings
6
6-32
Setting System Monitor Screen Restrictions
MEAP Settings
You can print information about installed MEAP applications.
Use HTTP Server
Set Use HTTP to 'On' to access this machine from a Web browser, and utilize the
installed MEAP applications.
NOTE
• Set Use HTTP to 'On' if HTTP is required for MEAP functions and MEAP applications. To
use HTTP for functions other than MEAP (e.g., the Remote UI), set Use HTTP in
Network Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See Chapter 3, "Using
a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
• If you set Use HTTP in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On',
the port number for MEAP functions and MEAP applications is automatically set to
'8000'.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [MEAP
Settings] ➞ [Use HTTP].
Select [On] or [Off].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
An HTTP server is used.
[Off]:
An HTTP server is not used.
MEAP Settings
6-33
6
System Manager Settings
IMPORTANT
• To access [User Management/Settings] from the SDL, set USE HTTP to 'On'.
• To manage user information for the Local Device Authentication system of SSO, set USE
HTTP to 'On'.
• To change the SSO user authentication system to Domain Authentication, Domain
Authentication + Local Device Authentication, or Local Device Authentication, set USE
HTTP to 'On'.
• To use the Remote UI, set USE HTTP to 'On'.
● If you select [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL> ➞ press [OK].
Use SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
[On]:
SSL is used to communicate.
[Off]:
SSL is not used to communicate.
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
NOTE
• Before setting <Use SSL> to 'On', it is necessary to set a default key in Network
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP
Network," in the Network Guide.)
• The Use HTTP mode is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power
switch is turned OFF, and then back ON). For instruction on restarting (turning the
main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Main Power and Control
Panel Power, " on p. 1-16.
• Any changes made to <Use SSL> are also applied to <Use SSL> in Remote UI in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
System Manager Settings
6
Printing Installed Application Information
You can print the MEAP application information, as well as certain system
application information.
NOTE
The information is printed as a report.
1
6-34
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [MEAP
Settings] ➞ [Print System Information].
MEAP Settings
Press [Yes].
*******************************
*** System Information ***
*******************************
MEAP Contents : 00.73
MEAP Specifications : 5,6,7,9,10,11
Application Name : PortalService
Application ID/System Application Name : 0906ebfc-d39e-4149-9cc5-3caa528fcd03
Application Version : 2.0.0
Status : Active
Installed on : Thu Apr 14 15:53:24 GMT+09:00 2005
Vendor : Canon Inc.
License Status : Unnecessary
Maximum Memory Usage : 220
Registered Service : com.canon.meap.service.portalservice.PortalService
Items printed for each application are as follows:
• MEAP Contents: Prints the MEAP version.
• MEAP Specifications: Prints information regarding the MEAP function.
• Application Name: Prints the name of the application.
• Application ID/System Application Name: Prints the system application's file
name or the Application ID of a standard application.
• Application Version: Prints the application's version number.
• Status: Prints the status of the application.
- Installed:
The application has been installed successfully.
- Active:
The application is running.
- Stopped:
The application is idle.
6
System Manager Settings
2
• Installed on: Prints the date and time the application was installed.
• Vendor: Prints the name of the application vendor.
• License Status: Prints the license status.
- Installed:
An effective license has been installed.
- Invalid:
The license is invalid.
- Overlimit:
The installed license has exceeded its user limit.
- Unnecessary:
You do not need a license to run the application.
• License Expires After: Prints the expiration date of the license. If License Status
shows "Unnecessary" as its value, the expiration date is not printed.
• License Upper Limit: Prints the upper license limit for each counter. If License
Status shows "Unnecessary" as its value, the upper license limit is not printed.
• Counter Value: Prints the current value for each counter. If License Status shows
"Unnecessary" as its value, the current counter value is not printed.
MEAP Settings
6-35
• Maximum Memory Usage: Prints the maximum amount of memory that can be
used by each application. The Maximum Memory Usage number is printed in
kilobytes (KB).
• Registered Service: Prints the service registered on the MEAP framework from
the application. The Registered Service is printed only if there is data that
corresponds to it.
NOTE
• The printed items are subject to change, as we are constantly improving our
products.
• In the sample printout, an application called "PortalService" is installed on the
machine. This application can be installed using the MEAP Administration Software
CD-ROM.
System Manager Settings
6
6-36
MEAP Settings
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
Registering device information in your machine enables you to set the machine to
deliver the same device information to other machines that are connected to the
same network. This enables you to easily manage multiple machines at the same
time.
Your machine is capable of both sending and receiving device information, which
can be delivered manually and automatically.
Host
The host machine delivers
device information to client
machines on the same network.
System Manager Settings
6
Client
Client
Client
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-37
The following device information can be delivered:
Delivered
Information
Address Book
Contents
Notes
• All of the currently stored destinations are
deleted, and then the destinations that are
The Address Book,
delivered are registered.
forwarding settings,
• Sending and receiving of the Address Book is
and favorites
available only if the optional Universal Send Kit
buttons
is activated or the optional Super G3 FAX
Board is attached.
• Only Department IDs existing in the client
machines are deleted.
• If an identical Department ID exists in the
client machine, its password and set counter
limits are overwritten. Counter values,
however, are not overwritten.
Department ID
System Manager Settings
6
System Manager
and Department ID • If a Department ID exists in the host machine,
but not in the client machine, the Department
Management
ID, password, and set counter limits from the
settings
host machine are added to the client machine.
Counter values are also added and reset.
• If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached to
the host machine and is not attached to the
client machine, or vice versa, only System
Manager Settings are delivered.
Printer Settings
Printer Settings
• Some Additional Functions settings are not
delivered. For more information, see the PS/
PCL/UFR II Printer Guide.
• Some Additional Functions settings are not
delivered. For more information, see
"Additional Functions Settings Table," on
p. 4-6.
Additional
Functions Settings
Value
6-38
Settings made from • Information for inboxes set with a password is
the Additional
not delivered. Information for inboxes set with
Functions screen
a password in the client machine is not
(excluding the
overwritten.
above settings)
• If you do not deliver Additional Functions
settings and the Address Book at the same
time, the settings in URL Send Settings in Mail
Box Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) may be erased.
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
Delivered
Information
Paper Information
Contents
Importing and
exporting of the
Paper Type
Management
Settings
Notes
• The user-defined paper types that are already
stored are delivered. Upon exporting, the
user-defined paper information is duplicated
and delivered. Upon importing, the
user-defined paper types that are already
stored are overwritten by the paper
information.
CAUTION
Preparing for delivery and updating the information after it is received may take
several minutes. Do not turn the main power OFF until these operations are
complete. Doing so may result in loss of data or damage to the data.
NOTE
Unique machine information, such as the IP address, is not delivered.
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-39
6
System Manager Settings
IMPORTANT
• Device information can be shared between machines of the same model
(imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050), and which have the Device Information Delivery
Settings mode. However, some information may not be delivered correctly depending on
the optional equipment that is attached to the machines.
• If [Restrictions for Receiving Device Info.] under <Receiving Settings> is set to 'Off' in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), device information can be
delivered from different machine models; however, some information may not be
delivered correctly. (See "Restricting the Reception of Device Information," on p. 6-49.)
• Device information cannot be delivered if the System Manager ID and System Password
registered in the client machine differs from the System Manager ID and System
Password registered in the host machine.
• Printer settings can only be delivered if the same printer kit has been activated for both
the client and host machine.
Registering/Deleting/Printing Delivery Destinations
You can register, confirm, and delete delivery destinations.
NOTE
The maximum number of destinations you can register is 100.
Registering Delivery Destinations
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Register
Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
Register a destination.
● To manually register a destination:
6
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [Register].
❑ Enter the IP address of the destination or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain
Name) (i.e., starfish.organization.company.com) ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
• If any of the following is true for the destination machine, a message <Could not
retrieve information for the device to register. Register as a destination?> is
displayed. If you press [Yes], <Deliverable Settings> on the Details screen will be
blank.
- The main power is turned OFF
- The destination machine is not connected to the network
- Every function in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving
Settings> in Device Information Delivery Settings is set to 'On'
6-40
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
● To automatically search for destinations:
❑ Press [Auto Search/Register].
❑ Press [Auto Search Start].
Press [-] or [+] to set the search depth (how many routers to search).
NOTE
• Since searching uses SLP (Service Location Protocol), machines behind a router
will not be detected if the router is set to restrict passing with the SLP protocol.
• If any of the following is true for the destination machine, you cannot search the
destination.
- The main power is turned OFF
- The destination machine is not connected to the network
- Every function in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving
Settings> in Device Information Delivery Settings is set to 'On'
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
To select all of the destinations, press [Select All]. However, if a destination is
selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].
NOTE
• You can cancel a selection by selecting the destination again.
• To cancel all destinations, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to
[Select All].)
3
Press [Done].
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-41
System Manager Settings
6
Confirming Delivery Destination Settings
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Register
Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
2
Select the destination whose settings you want to confirm ➞
press [Details].
3
Confirm the settings ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
6
If you have changed the destination machine's settings in Receive Restriction for
Each Function under <Receiving Settings> in Device Information Delivery
Settings, press [Get Information] to update the destination machine's
information.
NOTE
If any of the following is true for the destination machine whose settings you want to
confirm, <Deliverable Settings> on the Details screen will be blank.
- The main power is turned OFF
- The destination machine is not connected to the network
- Every function in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving
Settings> in Device Information Delivery Settings is set to 'On'
6-42
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
Deleting a Delivery Destination
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Register
Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
2
Select the destination that you want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
To select all destinations, press [Select All]. However, if a destination is selected,
this key changes to [Clear Selection].
NOTE
• You can cancel a selection by selecting the destination again.
• To cancel all destinations, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to
[Select All].)
3
Press [Yes].
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-43
6
System Manager Settings
1
Printing the Delivery Destinations
1
2
6
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Register
Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
Press [Print List].
System Manager Settings
NOTE
The delivery destination list can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR
(plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when
you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Auto Paper
Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 4-31.)
3
6-44
Press [Yes].
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
Setting Automatic Delivery
You can set to automatically deliver device information at a specified time. You can
also select which information to deliver.
IMPORTANT
• When delivering device information, the following machines will not update their
information:
- Machines which are processing a send job
- Machines importing or exporting data via the Remote UI
- Machines which are executing functions from the Additional Functions screen
• In addition to the above, machines which are having their address books accessed or are
sending a print job will not update their address books, and machines performing a print
job will not update their Printer Settings.
• Machines which could not receive device information because of a power failure or
network trouble, will not receive updated information until the first automatic update after
the machine recovers.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Auto Delivery
Settings] under <Transmitting Settings>.
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-45
6
System Manager Settings
NOTE
Device information is not delivered if the machine goes into the Shutdown mode, even if
an automatic delivery time is set.
2
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the start time using
-
(numeric keys)
➞ press [Next].
You can store up to five different start times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
6
➞ 0705
System Manager Settings
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
(Clear) to clear your
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]).
❑ Enter the start time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].
You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
6-46
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
(Clear) to clear your
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
3
Select which device information you want to deliver ➞ press
[Next].
Details of each item are shown below.
The machine will deliver the selected device information.
[Off]:
The machine will not deliver the selected device information.
6
<Network Settings>:
Available when [On] is selected for <Add. Functions Settings Value>. Select
[Include] to deliver the network settings, or [Exclude] to not deliver the network
settings ➞ press [Done].
NOTE
If the optional imagePASS is attached, <Network Settings> is always set to
'Exclude'.
4
Select the destinations ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-47
System Manager Settings
[On]:
Setting Manual Delivery
You can set to manually deliver device information.
IMPORTANT
• When delivering device information, the following machines will not update their
information:
- Machines which are processing a send job
- Machines importing or exporting data via the Remote UI
- Machines which are executing functions from the Additional Functions screen
- Machines which are having their address books accessed
• In addition to the above, machines which are having their address books accessed or are
sending a print job will not update their address books, and machines performing a print
job will not update their Printer Settings.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Manual Delivery]
under <Transmitting Settings>.
2
Select which device information you want to deliver ➞ press
[Next].
System Manager Settings
6
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
The machine delivers the selected device information.
[Off]:
The machine does not deliver the selected device information.
<Network Settings>:
Available when [On] is selected for <Add. Functions Settings Value>. Select
[Include] to deliver the network settings, or [Exclude] to not deliver the network
settings ➞ press [Done].
6-48
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
NOTE
If the optional imagePASS is attached, <Network Settings> is always set to
'Exclude'.
3
Select the destinations ➞ press [Manual delivery Start].
NOTE
Even if you press [Cancel] on the delivery in progress screen, delivery will not be
canceled for machines to which information has already been delivered. Delivery to
the next selected machine will be canceled.
4
When delivery is complete, confirm the delivery results
displayed in the <Status> column on the Manual Delivery
screen.
Restricting the Reception of Device Information
6
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Restrictions for
Receiving Device Info.] under <Receiving Settings>.
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
You can set whether to receive delivered device information from other model
machines, besides the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055/5050, which have the
Device Information Delivery Settings mode.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
Device information can only be delivered from other imageRUNNER 5075/
5065/5055/5050 machines with the Device Information Delivery Settings
mode.
[Off]:
Device information can be delivered from different machine models.
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-49
Restoring Device Information
You can restore device information to what it was before it was updated. This is
useful when you have accidentally updated the device information.
NOTE
You can return device information only to what it was at the time of the very last update.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Restore Data] under
<Receiving Settings>.
2
Select the information to restore ➞ press [Start].
System Manager Settings
6
IMPORTANT
• If you do not restore the Additional Functions settings and the Address Book at the
same time, the URL Send Settings in Mail Box Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) may be erased.
• You cannot restore the settings of optional Workflow Composer to what they were
before the device information was updated.
3
6-50
Press [Yes].
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
Restricting the Type of Information That Is Updated
You can restrict the type of device information that is received and updated.
IMPORTANT
While receiving and updating device information, the screen indicating that the settings
are being updated is displayed. Operations on this machine cannot be performed until
the update completes.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Receive Restriction
for Each Function] under <Receiving Settings>.
2
Select [On] or [Off] next to the functions you want to restrict ➞
press [Done].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
The machine is restricted, and does not update the selected device
information.
[Off]:
The machine is not restricted, and updates the device information.
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-51
System Manager Settings
6
NOTE
• Before setting <Add. Functions Settings Value>, <Dept. ID>, or <Address Book> to
'Off', it is necessary to set a default key in Network Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network
Guide.)
• Changes are only effective after you restart the machine (the main power switch is
turned OFF, and then back ON). For instructions on restarting (turning the main
power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Main Power and Control Panel
Power," on p. 1-16.
Checking/Printing the Communication Log
You can check and print the following information on the Communication log: Start
time, destination address, delivery result, end time, data content, and end code.
Checking the Communication Log
System Manager Settings
6
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Communication
Log].
2
Check the communication logs ➞ press [Done].
NOTE
To view the detailed information of a communication log, select the log ➞ press
[Details].
Printing the Communication Log
NOTE
For details on the Device Information Communication Log, see "Device Information
Communication Log Report," on p. 9-5.
1
6-52
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Device Information Delivery Settings] ➞ [Communication
Log].
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
2
Press [Print List].
If you want to print the list automatically at a specified time, press [Report
Settings].
● If you select [Report Settings]:
❑ Specify the desired print settings ➞ press [OK].
Auto Print
[On]:
The communication log is automatically printed when the number of
send and receive transmissions reaches 100.
[Off]:
The communication log is not printed automatically.
Daily Activity Report Time
If you select [On], enter the time using
-
(numeric keys).
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
(Clear) to clear your
If the number of send and receive transmissions exceed 100 before the
specified Auto Print time is reached, a communication log of the most recent
100 transmissions is printed.
[Separate Report Type]
If you want to print the delivery and receive logs separately, press [Separate
Report Type].
NOTE
The communication log can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you
press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Auto Paper
Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 4-31.)
3
Press [Yes].
Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings
6-53
6
System Manager Settings
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
Initializing All Data/Settings
This mode enables you to erase the following data stored in the machine. It is not
normally necessary to use this mode, but it is useful to erase personal or
confidential information when returning or disposing of the machine.
• Data
stored in inboxes
data stored in the Address Book
• Scan settings registered for the Sending function
• Mode Memory settings registered for the Copy or Mail Box function
• MEAP applications and license files
• Data saved from MEAP applications
• The password for the SMS (Service Management Service) login service of MEAP
(If you changed the password, it returns to the default password.)
• User authentication information registered in SDL (Simple Device Login)
• User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication
system of SSO (Single Sign-On)
• Unsent documents (reserved documents and documents set with the Delayed
Send mode)
• Job history
• Additional Functions settings
• Forms registered for the Image Composition mode
• Registered forwarding settings
• Key Pair and Server Certificate registered in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP
Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen)
• Address
System Manager Settings
6
CAUTION
• Before initiating the Initialize All Data/Settings mode, make sure that the data
you are erasing is completely unnecessary. Note that Canon will not be liable for
any damages resulting from the loss of data.
• If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached to the machine, and does not operate
properly after initializing the data, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
6-54
Initializing All Data/Settings
IMPORTANT
• To prevent other users from accidentally erasing all the data on the hard disk, it is
recommended to register a System Manager ID and System Password so that only the
System Manager can perform this procedure.
• Confirm that there are no current jobs being processed before using the Initialize All
Data/Settings mode.
• Back up any necessary data before initializing the data in the machine. For information
on the data that can be backed up, see "Backing Up Data," on p. 1-9.
• You cannot access the machine while the hard disk is being initialized.
• The Initialize All Data/Settings mode does not delete any data the machine has stored on
a server or computer.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Initialize All Data/Settings].
Press [Yes].
6
It may take more than 30 minutes to initialize the hard disk.
IMPORTANT
If there are any current jobs being processed, they will be canceled, and then
erased.
3
After the hard disk is initialized, press the main power switch
to OFF (" " side).
Initializing All Data/Settings
6-55
System Manager Settings
1
Displaying the Current Department ID/User Name
If you are using a login service, you can display the Department ID or user name
which is currently being used to log on to the machine in the Job/Print Status
Display Area.
The item displayed for each login service is shown below:
Login Service
Default Authentication
Department ID
SDL (Simple Device Login)
User Name
If you logged on to the domain to which the machine
belongs:
If you logged on to a domain to which the machine
SSO
(Single Sign-On) does not belong:
6
Item Displayed
User Name
User Name
System Manager Settings
If you logged on using the Local Device Authentication
User Name
system:
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Display ID/User Name].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
If you set Display ID/User Name to 'On', and you are not using a login service, the
Department ID/user name is not displayed.
6-56
Displaying the Current Department ID/User Name
Specifying Encrypted Secured Printing Settings
You can specify settings relating to encrypted secured printing.
NOTE
Encrypted Print Settings can be set only if the Encrypted Secure Print Software is
activated.
Setting to Receive Only Encrypted Secured Print Jobs
You can set the machine to only receive encrypted secured print jobs from
computers.
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Encrypted Print Settings] ➞ [Only Allow Encrypted Print
Jobs].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Encrypted Secured Printing Settings
6
System Manager Settings
1
6-57
USB Settings
This mode enables you to specify the USB settings.
NOTE
Changes are only effective after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned
OFF, and then back ON). For instruction on restarting (turning the main power switch
OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Main Power and Control Panel Power, " on p. 1-16.
Using a USB Device
Set Use USB Device to 'On' to connect a computer with the machine via the USB
port.
System Manager Settings
6
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [USB
Settings] ➞ [Use USB Device].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Using a USB Host
Set Use USB Host to 'On' to connect a host device with the machine via the USB
port.
6-58
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [USB
Settings] ➞ [Use USB Host].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
USB Settings
Setting the Display Method When Entering a
Password
You can set whether to display asterisks when entering confidential information,
such as a password.
NOTE
When the information is being displayed as asterisks, a screen prompting the user to
re-enter the information for confirmation purposes is displayed.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Use
Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords].
Select [On] or [Off].
6
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]:
When registering confidential information, it will be displayed as asterisks.
[Off]:
When registering confidential information, it will be displayed directly on
the screen.
Setting the Display Method When Entering a Password
6-59
System Manager Settings
1
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
You can select whether to set the Secure Watermark mode for each copy job, print
job, and print jobs from printer drivers, if performing such jobs with the Secure
Watermark mode always set. For more information on the Secure Watermark
mode, see Chapter 4 "Special Copying and Mail Box Feaures," in the Copying and
Mail Box Guide.
NOTE
[Secure Watermark Mode] is displayed only if the optional Secure Watermark is
activated.
Forced Secure Watermark
Forced Secure Watermark enables you to set the machine to always print the
specified hidden watermark on prints and copies.
System Manager Settings
6
1
2
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Secure Watermark Mode] ➞ [Forced Secure Watermark].
Press [Set] for the desired function.
Select the type of secure watermark to embed (Watermark,
Date, Copy Set Numbering, Serial Number, or ID/User Name).
● If you select [Watermark]:
❑ Select a preset watermark ➞ press [Next].
6-60
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
● If you select [Watermark] ➞ [Create]:
❑ Press [Enter] ➞ enter the desired text ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK] ➞ [Next].
If you have registered characters in Register Characters for Page No./
Watermark in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), you
can select the characters from the list.
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
● If you select [Date]:
❑ Select the date format ➞ press [Next].
System Manager Settings
6
● If you select [Copy Set Numbering]:
❑ Enter the starting number using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
6-61
● If you select [Serial Number]:
❑ Press [Next].
NOTE
The serial number that is displayed in the Job/Print Status Display Area when you
press (Counter Check) on the control panel is printed.
● If you select [ID/User Name]:
❑ Press [Next].
6
System Manager Settings
NOTE
• The ID or User Name of the user printing the document is printed.
• The watermark "COPY" is printed if a login service is not set.
6-62
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
4
Select the background pattern ➞ select the size of the text ➞
press [OK].
To print pattern on the background of copy, select the background pattern from
the Background Pattern drop-down list.
You can select [Small] (36 pt.), [Medium] (54 pt.), or [Large] (72 pt.) for the size
of the text.
To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored
Backgnd].
Printer Driver Secure Watermark
If you set the Printer Driver Secure Watermark mode, you can select whether to set
the Secure Watermark mode for each job.
NOTE
If both Forced Secure Watermark and Printer Driver Secure Watermark are set at the
same time, Forced Secure Watermark is given priority.
1
2
3
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Secure
Watermark Mode] ➞ [Printer Driver Secure Watermark].
Press [Set].
Select the type of secure watermark to embed (Watermark,
Date, Copy Set Numbering, Serial Number, or ID/User Name).
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
6-63
6
System Manager Settings
To print the characters vertically across the page, press [Print Characters
Vertically].
● If you select [Watermark]:
❑ Select a preset watermark ➞ press [Next].
● If you select [Watermark] ➞ [Create]:
❑ Press [Enter] ➞ enter the desired text ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK] ➞ [Next].
If you have registered characters in Register Characters for Page No./
Watermark in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), you
can select the characters from the list.
6
System Manager Settings
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters from the Touch
Panel Display," on p. 2-24.
● If you select [Date]:
❑ Select the date format ➞ press [Next].
6-64
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
● If you select [Copy Set Numbering]:
❑ Enter the starting number using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].
● If you select [Serial Number]:
❑ Press [Next].
6
System Manager Settings
NOTE
The serial number that is displayed in the Job/Print Status Display Area when you
press (Counter Check) on the control panel is printed.
● If you select [ID/User Name]
❑ Press [Next].
NOTE
• If you are using a login service, the name of the Department ID/User logged in is
printed.
• If you are not using a login service, the "COPY" watermark is printed.
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
6-65
4
Select the background pattern ➞ select the size and color of
the text ➞ press [OK].
To print a pattern on the background of a copy, select the background pattern
from the Background Pattern drop-down list.
You can select [Small] (36 pt.), [Medium] (54 pt.), or [Large] (72 pt.) for the size
of the text.
To print the characters vertically across the page, press [Print Characters
Vertically].
6
System Manager Settings
To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored
Backgnd].
6-66
Setting the Secure Watermark Mode
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types
You can register up to 200 paper types with new names other than the default
paper types registered in the machine. You can register a paper type by editing the
name after duplicating the closest paper type from a registered paper type.
Storing Irregular Paper Types
2
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Paper
Type Management Settings].
Select from the list a paper type that has closely resembling
characteristics to the paper type you are going to register ➞
press [Duplicate].
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types
6-67
6
System Manager Settings
1
NOTE
You cannot register a paper type with the same name as a default paper type.
Editing Irregular Paper Types
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Paper
Type Management Settings].
2
Select a paper type that you have registered from the list ➞
press [Details/Edit].
System Manager Settings
6
NOTE
• The icons displayed for irregular paper types indicate the following:
: A paper type registered by pressing [Duplicate] without its settings changed.
: A paper type registered by pressing [Duplicate], with its settings changed.
• You can press the drop-down list to select the paper types to display.
[All]: Select to display both default paper types and irregular paper types.
[Standard]: Select to display only default paper types.
[Custom]: Select to display only irregular paper types.
• You can use the Sort List by drop-down list to sort the list according to the order the
paper types were registered, the names of the paper types, or the weight of the
paper types.
6-68
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types
Press [Change] for the items that you want to change.
NOTE
You cannot change the settings of the default paper types.
● If you want to change the paper type's name:
❑ Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
6
System Manager Settings
3
● If you want to change the basis weight:
❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the paper weight ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types
6-69
● If you want to change the paper type:
❑ Select from [Normal], [Tab Paper], [Pre-punched], or [Letterhead] ➞ press
[OK].
● If you want to change the paper's finishing type:
❑ Select the paper's finishing type ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
6
● If you want to adjust the creep (displacement) correction:
❑ Press [▼] or [▲] to adjust the correction width ➞ press [OK].
You can set or change the correction width for each page and paper type
when the Booklet mode is set. The value you set here becomes the default
correction width when the selected paper type is used for saddle stitching
with automatic creep (displacement) correction.
6-70
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types
● If you want to change the color:
❑ Select the paper color ➞ press [OK].
Erasing Irregular Paper Types
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Paper
Type Management Settings].
2
Select a paper type that you have registered from the list ➞
press [Erase].
IMPORTANT
Confirm the contents to be erased.
3
Press [Yes].
Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types
6-71
System Manager Settings
6
PDL Selection (PnP)
From the machine, you can specify functions suitable for the fax board or printer kit
installed in the machine. From your computer, you can detect and install drivers that
are compatible with the specified functions.
IMPORTANT
• [PDL Selection (PnP)] is displayed only when at least two of the following options are
available for use.
- UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit or imagePASS
- Super G3 FAX Board
• If the desired driver is not in your computer, detection and installation cannot be
performed.
6
System Manager Settings
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [PDL
Selection (PnP)].
Select the button for the function that is applicable to Plug
and Play settings ➞ press [OK]
The displayed function buttons may differ, depending on the optional equipment
that is available for use.
6-72
PDL Selection (PnP)
Specifying Settings for All User Inboxes
You can specify settings for the time until documents in all of the user inboxes are
erased automatically, as well as whether to print upon storing from the printer
driver.
IMPORTANT
• If these settings have been previously specified for individual user inboxes, the settings
set in [Settings for All User Inboxes] are given priority, regardless of password settings for
each user inbox.
• If settings for individual user inboxes are changed after specifying settings in [Setting for
All User Inboxes], the settings for each individual user inbox are given priority.
Setting the Time until Documents Are Automatically
Erased
You can specify the time until the documents in user inboxes are automatically
erased.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Settings for All User Inboxes] ➞ [Time until Document Auto
Erase].
Press [▼] or [▲] to set the time until documents are
automatically erased ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Settings for All User Inboxes
6-73
System Manager Settings
6
Printing upon Storing from the Printer Driver
When storing documents from a computer into a user inbox, you can set whether to
print the result of the storing process. Select [On] to print the results.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Settings for All User Inboxes] ➞ [Print Upon Storing From the
Printer Driver].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
6
6-74
Specifying Settings for All User Inboxes
Restricting Printer Jobs
You can specify whether to restrict printer jobs so that they can only be stored in
user inboxes.
1
Press
[Additional Functions] ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict Printer Jobs].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Off]:
Restricts jobs from printer drivers.
Jobs can only be stored in user inboxes.
6
There are no restrictions for jobs from printer drivers.
Jobs can be stored in user inboxes and/or can be printed.
Restricting Printer Jobs
System Manager Settings
[On]:
6-75
System Manager Settings
6
6-76
Restricting Printer Jobs
Routine Maintenance
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to load paper, perform routine cleaning operations, and replace
consumables, such as toner and staple cartridges.
Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Loading Tab Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Attaching the One-Touch Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Changing the Paper Size for the Paper Deck-AE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Removing Punch Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1 (Optional). . . . . . . . . 7-42
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Manual Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Automatic Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-58
Wire Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Drum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Cleaning the Original Scanning Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7-1
Paper Drawers
This section describes how to load paper into the paper drawers.
NOTE
• The following paper sizes can be loaded into Paper Drawers 1, 2, 3, and 4.
- Paper Drawers 1 and 2: LTR
- Paper Drawers 3 and 4: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMTR
• For more information on available paper stock that can be loaded into the paper drawers,
see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-52.
Loading Paper
If the selected paper runs out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of paper
during printing, a screen prompting you to load paper appears on the touch panel
display.
7
Routine Maintenance
Follow the procedure below to load paper into the paper drawers.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
7-2
Paper Drawers
IMPORTANT
• A screen prompting you to load paper also appears if the selected paper drawer is not
fully inserted into the machine. Make sure that the paper drawer is properly in place.
• Do not load nonstandard paper sizes into the paper drawers.
• Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers. Doing so may cause a
paper jam.
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper
- Thin straw paper
- Transparencies
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the
reverse side of this paper either.)
• Fan the stack of paper well before loading it, and align the edges of the paper stack on a
flat surface.
• Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the drawer next to the paper
stack. Doing so may cause paper jams.
7
Routine Maintenance
NOTE
• If a message prompting you to load paper appears during printing, the remaining prints
are automatically made after you load the correct paper. If you select another paper
drawer, the remaining prints are made after you press [OK].
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• To use another available function, press [Another Function] ➞ select [Copy], [Send], [Mail
Box], [Scan], or [Printer] ➞ press [Done].
Paper Drawers
7-3
1
Press and release the button on the paper drawer in which
you want to load paper.
Routine Maintenance
7
2
7-4
Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
Paper Drawers
Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place,
away from direct sunlight.
NOTE
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to
facilitate feeding.
Paper Drawers
7-5
7
Routine Maintenance
3
4
Load the paper stack into the paper drawer.
Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the paper stack against the right
wall of the paper drawer.
When loading paper into Paper Drawer 3 or 4 for the first time, change the size
plate to match the paper size being loaded. (See "Adjusting a Paper Drawer to
Hold a Different Paper Size," on p. 7-8.)
When loading paper into the paper drawer, make sure that the paper size setting
is the same size as the paper being loaded.
Routine Maintenance
7
IMPORTANT
• Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark
( ) at the back of the paper drawer.
7-6
Paper Drawers
NOTE
• Paper Drawers 1 and 2 hold approximately 1,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond
(80 g/m2)).
• Paper Drawers 3 and 4 hold approximately 550 sheets of paper (20 lb bond
(80 g/m2)).
• If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to
load, follow those instructions.
• When the paper is loaded into the paper drawer, the side facing down is the one
printed on.
• If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper
stack over, and reload it.
• For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has
logos or patterns already printed on it), see "Relationship between Original
Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart," on p. 9-11.
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
7
Routine Maintenance
5
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Paper Drawers
7-7
IMPORTANT
You will not be able to make copies or print if you load paper that exceeds the
loading limit, or if the paper drawer is not completely pushed into the machine.
Always check that the paper drawers are in place, and that the paper does not
exceed the loading limit.
NOTE
If paper runs out during copying or printing, load a new paper stack, and follow the
instructions on the touch panel display. The machine automatically restarts, and
produces the remaining copies or prints.
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size
If you want to load a different paper size into Paper Drawer 3 or 4, follow the
procedure described below to adjust the paper drawer guides.
NOTE
• You can adjust the paper drawers to hold the following standard paper sizes: 11" x 17",
LGL, LTR, LTRR, or STMTR.
• Only the paper sizes of Paper Drawer 3 and 4 can be changed.
7
Routine Maintenance
1
7-8
Press and release the button on the paper drawer that you
want to adjust. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer
until it stops. Remove all of the remaining paper.
Paper Drawers
2
Squeeze the lever on the left guide, as shown below. Without
releasing the lever, slide the left guide to align it with the mark
for the desired paper size.
Left Guide
When loading 11" x 17" paper, slide the left guide all the way to the left, and push
it down.
3
Squeeze the lever on the front guide, as shown below. Without
releasing the lever, slide the front guide to align it with the
mark for the desired paper size.
Front Guide
IMPORTANT
• If the left and front guides are not adjusted properly for the paper size loaded in the
paper drawer, the correct paper size may not appear on the touch panel display.
• Adjust the left and front guides correctly to avoid causing a paper jam, dirty prints,
or make the inside of the machine dirty.
Paper Drawers
7-9
Routine Maintenance
7
4
Load the appropriate size paper into the paper drawer.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
5
Change the paper drawer's size plate to match the new paper
size.
Size Plate
6
Routine Maintenance
7
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
7-10
Paper Drawers
Loading Tab Paper
Tab paper can be loaded in Paper Drawer 3 or 4. Follow the procedure described
below to adjust the paper drawer to hold tab paper.
Use the Tab Feeding Attachment-A1 to load tab paper. The optional Tab Feeding
Attachment-A1 includes the one-touch supports, tab paperweight bar, and underlay
sheet.
IMPORTANT
Tab paper is available in LTR size only.
NOTE
• When tab paper is loaded in the paper drawer, the side facing down is the one
printed on.
• Load the tab paper as shown in the illustration below.
Load Face Down.
1
Routine Maintenance
7
Press and release the button on the paper drawer in which
you want to load tab paper.
Paper Drawers
7-11
2
3
Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
Squeeze the lever on the left guide, as shown below, and slide
the left guide to the left as far as it will go.
Routine Maintenance
7
4
Squeeze the lever on the front guide, as shown below. Without
releasing the lever, slide the front guide to align it with the
mark for tab paper (LTR).
IMPORTANT
• If the left and front guides are not adjusted properly for the paper size loaded in the
paper drawer, the correct paper size may not appear on the touch panel display.
• Adjust the left and front guides correctly to avoid causing a paper jam, dirty prints,
or make the inside of the machine dirty.
7-12
Paper Drawers
6
Place the tab paper underlay sheet so that the labeled side is
face up.
Load the tab paper into the paper drawer.
Load the tab paper face down with the tabs facing left, as shown in the
illustration below.
Even out the edges of the paper stack.
Load the paper stack against the right wall of the paper drawer.
7
Tabs
IMPORTANT
• Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark
( ) at the back of the paper drawer.
Paper Drawers
7-13
Routine Maintenance
5
7
Squeeze the lever on the left guide, and without releasing the
lever, slide the left guide to align it with the tab paper.
NOTE
If the front guide needs further adjustment, squeeze the lever on the front guide,
and without releasing the lever, slide the front guide to align it with the tab paper.
8
Remove the tab paperweight bar from its holder, and place it
as shown below to hold the tab paper in place.
Routine Maintenance
7
Tab Paperweight Bar Holder
NOTE
When you are not using tab paper, store the tab paperweight bar, as shown below.
Line up the holes on the tab paperweight bar with the one-touch supports, and
place the tab paperweight bar over the one-touch supports to lock it in place.
7-14
Paper Drawers
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Never place paper or any other items in the open part of the paper drawer next to
the paper stack. Doing so may cause a paper jam.
NOTE
• When you load tab paper, make sure to store the tab paper setting in Register
Paper Type in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
• For more information on copying on tab paper, see Chapter 4, "Special Copying
and Mail Box Features," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.
Paper Drawers
7-15
7
Routine Maintenance
9
Attaching the One-Touch Supports
This section describes how to attach the one-touch supports for storing the tab
paperweight bar.
1
2
Press down on the top of the one-touch supports with your
thumb to fix them into place.
Routine Maintenance
7
Insert the two one-touch supports into the paper drawer, as
shown below.
7-16
Paper Drawers
Feeder
Originals sent by fax or the Send function via the feeder, can be stamped to indicate
that they have been sent. Replace the stamp cartridge when this mark is faint or no
longer visible.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the stamp cartridge, take care not to allow toner to come into contact
with your hands or clothing. If toner gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off
immediately with cold water.
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge
Open the feeder cover, and then open the inner cover.
If you are using the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055, first open the cover with the
green tab and then open the cover with the blue tab to open the inner cover.
Stamp Cartridge
Inner Cover
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
Stamp Cartridge
Inner Cover
imageRUNNER 5050
Feeder
7
Routine Maintenance
1
7-17
2
Remove the old stamp cartridge, using the provided tweezers.
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
3
imageRUNNER 5050
Push in the new stamp cartridge until it clicks into place,
using the provided tweezers.
Routine Maintenance
7
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
imageRUNNER 5050
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the stamp cartridge is not protruding from the surface.
• Insert the stamp cartridge properly, or paper jams may occur.
7-18
Feeder
Gently close the inner cover, and then close the feeder cover.
If you are using the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055, first close the cover with the
blue tab and then close the cover with the green tab to close the inner cover.
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
imageRUNNER 5050
CAUTION
When closing the covers, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
7
Routine Maintenance
4
Feeder
7-19
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
If you attach the optional Paper Deck-AD1 or Paper Deck-AE1 to the machine, you
have one additional source of paper for printing jobs. The Paper Deck-AD1 and
Paper Deck-AE1 hold up to 3,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
IMPORTANT
If the machine is in the Sleep mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the main
power indicator is lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the
control panel power switch to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button on
the paper deck.
NOTE
The following paper sizes can be loaded into the paper decks:
- Paper Deck-AD1: LTR only
- Paper Deck-AE1: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and LTRR
Loading Paper
Routine Maintenance
7
If you select the paper deck when it has no paper, or if the paper deck runs out of
paper during a print job, a screen prompting you to load paper appears on the
touch panel display.
Follow the procedure below to load paper into the paper deck.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
IMPORTANT
The paper deck can only accommodate paper from 17 lb bond to 110 lb index
(64 to 200 g/m2) in weight.
7-20
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
NOTE
If a message prompting you to load paper appears during printing, the remaining prints
are automatically made after you load the correct paper. If you select another paper
source, the remaining prints are made after you press [OK].
1
Press the open button to open the paper deck.
The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position.
Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.
7
Routine Maintenance
2
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
7-21
IMPORTANT
• Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place,
away from direct sunlight.
• Do not load the following types of paper into the paper deck. Doing so may cause a
paper jam.
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper
- Thin straw paper: less than 17 lb bond (64 g/m2) (approximately)
- Transparencies or tab paper
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on
the reverse side of this paper either.)
NOTE
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to
facilitate feeding.
Routine Maintenance
7
3
Load the paper stack into the paper deck.
Make sure that the inside lifter has lowered before loading paper, and even out
the edges of the paper stack.
IMPORTANT
• Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out before loading it
into the paper deck.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark
( ) on the inside of the paper deck.
7-22
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
NOTE
• The paper deck holds approximately 3,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
• Load the paper stack in stages, adding approximately 500 sheets of paper (20 lb
bond (80 g/m2)) at a time. If the paper deck can accommodate more paper, the
lifter will descend.
• Only load LTR paper into the Paper Deck-AD1. Paper cannot be loaded
horizontally.
• If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to
load, follow those instructions.
• When paper is loaded in the paper deck, the side facing up is the one
printed on.
• If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper
stack over, and reload it.
• For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has
logos or patterns already printed on it), see "Relationship between Original
Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart," on p. 9-11.
Close the paper deck.
7
Routine Maintenance
4
The inside lifter automatically rises, and prepares the paper deck for feeding.
CAUTION
When closing the paper deck, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
7-23
Changing the Paper Size for the Paper Deck-AE1
This section explains how to change the paper size for the optional Paper
Deck-AE1. It is necessary to register the paper size for the paper deck in Register
Sizes for Side Paper Deck in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) before loading the paper. (See "Storing Paper Sizes for the Paper Deck,"
on p. 4-52.)
1
Register the desired paper size for the paper deck in Register
Sizes for Side Paper Deck in Common Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
For instructions on registering the paper size for the Paper Deck-AE1, see
"Storing Paper Sizes for the Paper Deck," on p. 4-52.)
2
Press the open button to open the paper deck.
Routine Maintenance
7
IMPORTANT
If the machine is in the Sleep mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the
main power indicator is lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this
case, press the control panel power switch to reactivate the machine, and then
press the open button on the paper deck.
7-24
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
3
4
Remove all of the loaded paper and the paper size sheet.
Remove the white screw on the top of the back size switch
plate A by turning it counterclockwise.
Back Size Switch Plate A
Routine Maintenance
5
7
Remove size switch plate A.
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
7-25
6
Remove the white screw on the back size switch plate B.
Back Size Switch Plate B
7
Remove the back size switch plate B.
Routine Maintenance
7
8
Align the back size switch plate B with the marks for the
desired paper size.
11x17
LTR
LGL
LTR
A3
A4
B4
B5
A4
A4
B5
LTR
LTR
/LGL
A4
B5/B4
LTR/11x17
A4/A3
7-26
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
9
10
Fix the back size switch plate B to the paper deck with the
white screw by turning it clockwise.
Insert and align size switch plate A with the marks for the
desired paper size.
A3
A4
11x17
LTR
B4
B5
LGL
LTR
A4
B4
A3
11x17
B5/B4
LTR
A4
LGL
LTR/11x17
A4/A3
7
LTR
11
Routine Maintenance
A4
Fix the size switch plate A with the white screw by turning it
clockwise.
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
7-27
IMPORTANT
• If the back size switch plates A and B are not adjusted properly for the paper size
loaded in the paper deck, the correct paper size may not appear on the touch panel
display.
• Adjust the back size switch plates correctly to avoid causing a paper jam, dirty
prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.
12
Remove the white screw on the front size switch plate by
turning it counterclockwise.
Front Size Switch Plate
13
Remove the front size switch plate.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-28
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
14
Align the front size switch plate with the marks for the desired
paper size.
LGL
LTR
A4
B4
B5
11x17
LTR
A3
A4
A4/A3
LTR/11x17
B5/B4
LTR
A4
Fix the front size switch plate to the paper deck with the white
screw by turning it clockwise.
7
IMPORTANT
• If the front size switch plate is not adjusted properly for the paper size loaded in the
paper deck, the correct paper size may not appear on the touch panel display.
• Adjust the front size switch plate correctly to avoid causing a paper jam, dirty prints,
or make the inside of the machine dirty.
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
7-29
Routine Maintenance
15
/LGL
16
Insert the correct underlay sheet that matches the new paper
size into the paper deck.
Align the arrow on the underlay sheet with the guide on the paper deck's left wall.
17
Load the paper stack into the paper deck.
Routine Maintenance
7
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
• Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out before loading it
into the paper deck.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark
( ) on the inside of the paper deck.
7-30
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
NOTE
• The paper deck holds approximately 3,500 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
• Load the paper stack in stages, adding approximately 500 sheets of paper (20 lb
bond (80 g/m2)) at a time. If the paper deck can accommodate more paper, the
lifter will descend.
• If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to
load, follow those instructions.
• When paper is loaded in the paper deck, the side facing up is the one printed on.
• If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper
stack over, and reload it.
• For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has
logos or patterns already printed on it), see "Relationship between Original
Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart," on p. 9-11.
18
Place a size sticker indicating the new paper size that is
loaded in the paper deck.
19
Routine Maintenance
7
Close the paper deck.
CAUTION
When closing the paper deck, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
7-31
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1
(Optional)
This section describes the procedure for replacing the staple cartridge in the
optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2, and how to remove the punch waste
from the optional Puncher Unit-AT1.
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit
When the optional Finisher-AD1 or Saddle Finisher-AD2 is almost out of staples,
and the staple cartridge in the stapler unit must be replaced, a screen similar to the
one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure
described below to replace the staple cartridge.
Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.
Routine Maintenance
7
NOTE
We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer
before your stock runs out.
7-32
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
1
Open the front cover of the finisher.
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
2
The Optional Finisher-AD1
Lift and pull out the staple case from the stapler unit, holding
it by its green tab.
3
Routine Maintenance
7
Place the staple case, as shown below, press the area
indicated by PUSH, and then pull out the staple cartridge.
PUS
PUS
H
H
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
7-33
4
Insert the new staple cartridge.
Press the spring-loaded case down until it clicks into place.
PUS
H
PUS
H
IMPORTANT
• Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.
• Do not remove the seal that holds the staples together before you place the staple
cartridge into the staple case.
NOTE
Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.
5
Routine Maintenance
7
Remove the seal holding the staples together, by pulling it
straight out, and then down.
PUS
H
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you pull the seal straight out, and then down. If you pull it out at an
angle, it may tear.
7-34
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
7
Gently push the staple case into the stapler unit, until it is
securely in place.
Close the front cover of the finisher.
7
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
Routine Maintenance
6
The Optional Finisher-AD1
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
NOTE
If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit
automatically performs a "dry" stapling operation to reposition the staples.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
7-35
Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Saddle Stitcher Unit
When the saddle stitcher unit of the optional Saddle Finisher-AD2 is almost out of
staples, and the staple cartridge must be replaced, a screen similar to the one
shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described
below to replace the staple cartridge.
Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.
IMPORTANT
• This procedure is necessary only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached.
• If necessary, remove all of the output paper in the Booklet Tray before replacing the
staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit.
Routine Maintenance
7
NOTE
We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer
before your stock runs out.
1
7-36
Open the front cover of the finisher.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
2
Grip the saddle stitcher unit by its handle, and pull it out of the
finisher until it stops.
Saddle Stitcher Unit
3
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you,
and then push it up.
Stapler Unit of the
Saddle Stitcher Unit
4
Pull out the empty staple cartridge, holding it by its left and
right sides.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
7-37
Routine Maintenance
7
5
Insert the new staple cartridge.
NOTE
Only one front and rear staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.
6
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you,
and then push it down into its original position.
Routine Maintenance
7
7
7-38
Gently push the saddle stitcher unit back into its original
position.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
8
Close the front cover of the finisher.
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
When you have replaced the staple cartridge, be sure to manually reposition the
staples in the saddle stitcher unit. (See "Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning," on p.
4-59.)
Removing Punch Waste
When the punch waste tray of the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 becomes full, a
screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow
the procedure described below to remove the punch waste.
NOTE
This procedure is necessary only if the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
7-39
Routine Maintenance
7
1
Open the front cover of the punch waste tray.
2
Pull out the punch waste tray.
3
Discard the punch waste.
Routine Maintenance
7
NOTE
Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied.
7-40
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
4
Return the punch waste tray to its original position.
NOTE
If the punch waste tray is not securely in place, you cannot make prints in the Hole
Punch mode.
Close the front cover of the punch waste tray.
7
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the punch waste tray, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2/Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
7-41
Routine Maintenance
5
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document
Insertion Unit-E1 (Optional)
This section describes how to load paper into the insertion unit.
Loading Paper
This section describes the procedure for feeding sheets using the optional
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1.
1
Adjust the slide guides to fit the paper size.
2
Load the paper stack into the document insertion unit.
Routine Maintenance
7
❑ Load the paper face up.
7-42
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1 (Optional)
IMPORTANT
Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to
facilitate feeding.
NOTE
• Only load paper for use as a cover.
• You cannot make copies or prints on paper that is loaded in the document insertion
unit.
• You can load 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or EXEC paper into the tray of the
document insertion unit.
• A maximum of 100 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)) can be loaded in the tray
of the document insertion unit.
7
Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].
Routine Maintenance
3
IMPORTANT
Select the same paper size that is loaded in the document insertion unit.
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1 (Optional)
7-43
4
Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper, be sure to correctly
set the paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect
the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a
service repair, or the paper could jam.
NOTE
• For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-52.
• You can register a paper type that is not listed in [Detailed Settings] in the Stack
Bypass Settings: Selecting the Paper Type screen. For details on registering paper
types, see "Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types," on p. 6-67.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-44
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1 (Optional)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When there is only a small amount of toner remaining inside the machine, the
following message appears on the touch panel display. You can continue printing,
but at this time you should purchase a new toner cartridge to have it available when
needed.
If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes
and scanning originals, even if you do not replace the toner cartridge immediately.
WARNING
Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause
the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
7-45
7
Routine Maintenance
When toner runs out completely and prints can no longer be made, a screen with
instructions on how to replace the toner cartridge, like the one shown below,
appears on the touch panel display. Follow the instructions on the touch panel
display, and the procedure described below to help you replace the toner cartridge.
CAUTION
• Keep toner out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a
physician immediately.
• Take care not to allow toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If
toner gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water.
Washing it off with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to
remove the toner stains.
IMPORTANT
• Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine.
• Do not replace toner cartridges until the message prompting you to do so appears.
NOTE
• You can replace a toner cartridge during the machine is printing.
• When the message <Replace the toner cartridge.> appears, the remaining toner is low. It
is recommended that you get a new toner cartridge ready for replacement before the
toner runs out.
• Complete instructions on how to replace the toner cartridge can be accessed by pressing
[Previous] or [Next] on the touch panel display.
• If toner runs out during a print job, the remaining prints are made after you replace the
toner cartridge.
Routine Maintenance
7
1
7-46
Open the toner replacement cover.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
2
Lower the locking lever.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to lower the locking lever all the way to the 'Unlock' position. (Otherwise,
you may not be able to remove the toner cartridge.)
Remove the toner cartridge, supporting it with both hands.
7
CAUTION
Do not touch the tip of the toner cartridge or subject it to shock by hitting
it. Doing so may cause the toner cartridge to leak.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
7-47
Routine Maintenance
3
4
Insert the new toner cartridge.
Remove the red protective cap from the new toner cartridge by twisting it. Then,
insert it into the machine, as shown below.
Ribbed End of
the Toner Cartridge
Routine Maintenance
7
Ridges of the Tray
IMPORTANT
• Align the ribbed end of the toner cartridge with the toner supply port as shown in
the illustration above.
• Only use toner cartridges intended for use in this machine.
• Insert the toner cartridge horizontally into the machine. Otherwise, the toner
cartridge may leak.
5
7-48
Return the locking lever to its original position.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
CAUTION
When returning the locking lever to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to return the locking lever all the way to the 'Lock' position. (Otherwise,
the toner cartridge will not be inserted properly.)
Close the toner replacement cover.
CAUTION
7
When closing the toner replacement cover, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Routine Maintenance
6
7-49
Routine Cleaning
If the original is not copied clearly, clean the following parts of the machine. For
high-quality printouts, we recommend cleaning these parts once or twice a month.
• Platen
glass
of the feeder
• Feeder's rollers
• Underside
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and
disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning. Doing
so may result in damage to the plastic parts.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area
around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the power outlet with a dry
cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is
connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust
can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short
circuit and result in a fire.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-50
Routine Cleaning
Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder by following the procedure
below.
IMPORTANT
If the platen glass or the underside of the feeder is dirty, the original may not be scanned
clearly, or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly.
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder with a
cloth dampened with water, and then wipe them clean with a
soft, dry cloth.
7
Routine Maintenance
1
CAUTION
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or
break the machine.
Routine Cleaning
7-51
Manual Feeder Cleaning
If originals that have been fed through the feeder have streaks or appear dirty, clean
the feeder's rollers.
CAUTION
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the
machine.
IMPORTANT
Spin the rollers while cleaning them.
For the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
1
Open the feeder cover.
Routine Maintenance
7
2
7-52
Clean the rollers (a total of 13 places) inside the feeder cover
with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a
soft, dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
3
4
Clean the rollers (a total of 13 places), as shown below, with a
cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft,
dry cloth.
Open the inner cover, holding it by its tab.
Inner Cover
5
Clean the rollers (a total of four places) inside the inner cover
with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a
soft, dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
7-53
Routine Maintenance
7
6
7
Clean the rollers (a total of four places) on the underside of
the inner cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe
the area with a soft, dry cloth.
Close the inner cover.
Routine Maintenance
7
CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
7-54
Routine Cleaning
8
Close the feeder cover.
CAUTION
When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
For the imageRUNNER 5050
1
Open the feeder cover.
Routine Maintenance
7
2
Clean the rollers (a total of eight places) inside the feeder
cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area
with a soft, dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
7-55
3
4
Clean the rollers (a total of three places), as shown below, with
a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft,
dry cloth.
Open the inner cover, holding it by its tab.
Inner Cover
Routine Maintenance
7
5
7-56
Clean the rollers (a total of nine places) inside the inner cover
with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a
soft, dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
7
Clean the rollers (a total of four places) on the underside of
the inner cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe
the area with a soft, dry cloth.
Close the inner cover.
7
CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Routine Cleaning
7-57
Routine Maintenance
6
8
Close the feeder cover.
CAUTION
When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
Automatic Feeder Cleaning
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the
feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder.
7
Routine Maintenance
NOTE
It takes approximately 15 seconds to clean the feeder.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Feeder Cleaning].
2
Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder ➞ press [Start].
Make sure that you fan the sheets of paper well.
Use plain LTR paper.
When cleaning is complete, try scanning again.
NOTE
To cancel feeder cleaning while it is in progress, press [Cancel].
7-58
Routine Cleaning
Wire Cleaning
If streaks appear on printed output, or random parts of the printed image are
missing, clean the corona assembly wires inside the main unit.
NOTE
• It takes approximately 35 seconds to clean the wires.
• Wire cleaning cannot be performed during printing.
• The machine may clean the wires automatically if it detects that the wires are dirty.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Wire Cleaning].
Press [Start].
When cleaning is complete, try printing again.
Drum Cleaning
NOTE
• It takes approximately 5 minutes to clean the drum.
• Drum cleaning cannot be performed during printing.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞
[Drum Cleaning].
Press [Start].
NOTE
If you do not want to perform cleaning, press [Cancel].
Routine Cleaning
7-59
7
Routine Maintenance
If you use the machine immediately after installation, or if the machine is not used
for a long period of time, such as during a holiday, there may be rare cases in which
the images printed become light or distorted. If the images printed are light or
distorted, clean the drum as necessary.
Cleaning the Original Scanning Area
If originals are scanned using the feeder, there may be some cases in which the
original cannot be scanned properly, or streaks appear on the output. In this case,
clean the original scanning area of the feeder by following the directions displayed
in Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the
Additional Functions screen).
For the imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
1
Lift the feeder.
Routine Maintenance
7
2
7-60
Clean the original scanning area (thin glass strip) with a well
wrung-out damp cloth. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry
cloth.
Routine Cleaning
3
4
Clean the part located next to the rubber roller with a well
wrung-out damp cloth. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry
cloth.
Pull the lever on the top part of the feeder to open the cover of
the feeder's original scanning area.
5
Remove the original scanning area cleaning tool from inside
the cover.
Routine Cleaning
7-61
Routine Maintenance
7
6
7
Fold the cleaning cloth in two as shown below.
Attach the cleaning cloth to the original scanning area
cleaning tool.
Routine Maintenance
7
8
7-62
Open the inner cover.
Routine Cleaning
9
Clean the feeder's original scanning area along the rail.
10
Close the inner cover.
CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
11
Remove the cleaning cloth from the original scanning area
cleaning tool, and return the cleaning tool to its original
position inside the feeder's original scanning area cover.
Routine Cleaning
7-63
Routine Maintenance
7
12
Close the feeder's original scanning area cover.
CAUTION
When closing the feeder's original scanning area cover, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
13
Close the feeder.
Routine Maintenance
7
CAUTION
When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
7-64
Routine Cleaning
For the imageRUNNER 5050
1
2
Lift the feeder.
Clean the feeder's scanning area with a cloth dampened with
water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
Routine Maintenance
7
Feeder's Scanning Area
3
Clean the part located next to the rubber roller with a cloth
dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry
cloth.
Routine Cleaning
7-65
4
Close the feeder.
CAUTION
When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-66
Routine Cleaning
Consumables
The following consumables are available from Canon. For more information,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your local authorized
Canon dealer before your stock runs out.
■ Paper Stock
In addition to plain paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and STMT), recycled paper, color paper,
transparencies (recommended for this machine), tracing paper, labels, and other types of
paper stock are available. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
CAUTION
Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the
paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
IMPORTANT
To prevent moisture build-up, tightly wrap any remaining paper in its original package for
storage.
NOTE
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• Some commercially available paper types are not suited for this machine. Contact your
local authorized Canon dealer when you need to purchase paper.
Consumables
7-67
Routine Maintenance
7
■ Toner
If a message prompting you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the touch panel
display, replace the used toner cartridge with a new one.
Only use toner cartridges intended for use with this machine.
WARNING
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause
the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may
cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
7
Routine Maintenance
Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these
items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
IMPORTANT
• Store toner cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. (The recommended
storage conditions are: temperatures below 86°F, and humidity below 80%.)
• The toner cartridge for this product will be available for at least seven years after
production of the machine has stopped.
■ Stamp Cartridge
The stamp cartridge is used to stamp originals. Use the tweezers provided to remove and
replace the stamp cartridge.
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
7-68
Consumables
imageRUNNER 5050
■ Genuine Supplies
Canon has developed and manufactured Toner, Parts, and Supplies specifically for use in
this machine. For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and
productivity, we recommend that you use Genuine Canon Toner, Parts, and Supplies.
Contact your Canon Authorized Dealer or Service Provider for Genuine Canon Supplies.
Routine Maintenance
7
Consumables
7-69
Routine Maintenance
7
7-70
Consumables
Troubleshooting
8
CHAPTER
This chapter explains what to do in response to a paper jam in the main unit or optional units,
and an error message display.
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing Unit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Inside the Upper and Lower Right Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Paper Drawers 3 and 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Inside the Top Cover of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Output Delivery Unit of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Inside the Front Cover of the Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Insertion Unit (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53
Inside the Insertion Unit (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-62
Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-69
Copy Tray-L1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-71
Clearing Staple Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-76
Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-79
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
Self-Diagnostic Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-84
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-87
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
Service Call Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
8-1
8. Troubleshooting
Setting the Limited Functions Mode from the Service Call Message Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Troubleshooting
When the Power Does Not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
8
8-2
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams
If paper jams occur frequently, even though there is no apparent problem with the
machine, either one of the following two reasons may be the cause. Follow the
instructions described below to reduce the frequency of paper jams.
■ There are torn pieces of paper left inside the machine.
Pulling jammed paper out of the machine by force may leave parts of the paper torn
inside, leading to frequent paper jams. If paper tears while you are trying to remove
jammed paper from the machine, make sure that you remove all of the torn pieces.
Make sure that the left and front guides of Paper Drawers 3 and 4 match the size of the
paper loaded in the paper drawers. If the guides are set incorrectly, paper jams may occur
more frequently.
Troubleshooting
■ The guides are set incorrectly.
8
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams
8-3
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the following screens appear on the touch panel display.
Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam and instructions on how to clear
the paper jam appear on the touch panel display. This screen repeatedly appears
on the touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared.
■ Example of a Screen Indicating the Location of the Paper Jam
Troubleshooting
The location of the paper jam is indicated by a red circle in the upper right corner of the
screen.
8
If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes and
scanning originals, even if the jammed paper is not removed immediately.
IMPORTANT
• If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue operating the machine. Follow
the directions on the touch panel display to clear the paper jam. (See "Feeder," on
p. 8-11.)
• If a MEAP application screen is displayed, a message appears in the Job/Print monitor
area. Press [System Monitor] ➞ follow the procedures that appear on the touch panel
display to help you remove the jammed paper.
8-4
Clearing Paper Jams
■ Example of a Screen Indicating How to Clear the Paper Jam
WARNING
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the
machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may
result in burns or electrical shock.
• After clearing all paper jams, remove your hands from the machine immediately.
Even if the machine is not in operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get
caught in the feed rollers, which could result in personal injury or damage if the
machine suddenly starts printing.
NOTE
If paper is jammed in several locations, remove the jammed paper in the order indicated
on the touch panel display.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-5
Troubleshooting
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
8
1
Inspect all paper jam locations indicated on the touch panel
display, and remove any jammed paper.
See the appropriate pages below for instructions on finding and removing
jammed paper. Or, you can follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
If jammed paper tears while it is being removed, be sure to remove any
remaining pieces from inside the machine.
IMPORTANT
If the machine's power is turned OFF when there is a paper jam, detection of paper
jams in the paper drawers is not possible after the power is turned back ON. Clear
paper jams without turning the power OFF.
Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Some areas that are shown to have paper jams may not actually have paper jams.
However, always check all locations indicated on the touch panel display in the
order that is given.
• The following image, which is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen,
indicates the possible locations where paper jams may occur. The page number
describing how to remove the jammed paper is also shown below.
- Feeder (See "Feeder," on p. 8-11.)
- Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing Unit)
(See "Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing Unit)," on p. 8-15.)
- Stack Bypass (See "Stack Bypass," on p. 8-21.)
- Upper and Lower Right Cover (See "Inside the Upper and Lower Right Covers,"
on p. 8-23.)
- Paper Drawers 3 and 4 (See "Paper Drawers 3 and 4," on p. 8-31.)
- Paper Drawer 1 (See "Paper Drawer 1," on p. 8-26.)
- Paper Drawer 2 (See "Paper Drawer 2," on p. 8-29.)
8
8-6
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs inside an optional unit, see the
instructions on the following pages.
● Paper Deck-AD1
❑ See "Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)," on p. 8-33.
● Paper Deck-AE1
❑ See "Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)," on p. 8-33.
Troubleshooting
2
8
Clearing Paper Jams
8-7
● Finisher-AD1
❑ See "Inside the Top Cover of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2
(Optional)," on p. 8-37.
❑ See "Output Delivery Unit of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2
(Optional)," on p. 8-40.
● Saddle Finisher-AD2
Troubleshooting
❑ See "Inside the Top Cover of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2
❑ See "Output Delivery Unit of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2
8
❑ See "Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional)," on p. 8-49.
(Optional)," on p. 8-37.
(Optional)," on p. 8-40.
❑ See "Inside the Front Cover of the Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional)," on p. 8-45.
8-8
Clearing Paper Jams
● Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1
❑ See "Insertion Unit (Optional)," on p. 8-53.
❑ See "Inside the Insertion Unit (Optional)," on p. 8-58.
❑ See "Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 (Optional)," on p. 8-62.
● Document Insertion Unit-E1
Troubleshooting
❑ See "Insertion Unit (Optional)," on p. 8-53.
❑ See "Inside the Insertion Unit (Optional)," on p. 8-58.
8
● Puncher Unit-AT1
❑ See "Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)," on p. 8-69.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-9
● Copy Tray-L1
❑ See "Copy Tray-L1 (Optional)," on p. 8-71.
Troubleshooting
3
4
After you have removed all of the jammed paper in the
locations indicated on the touch panel display, restore all
levers and covers to their original positions.
Continue to follow the procedure and instructions on the
touch panel display.
Once you have removed all of the jammed paper in locations other than the
feeder, printing or copying resumes.
If there is paper that still needs to be removed, a screen indicating how to clear
that paper jam appears on the touch panel display. Repeat the procedure from
step 1.
8
NOTE
You do not have to re-enter the number of copies or prints, even if you are printing
multiple sets. The machine automatically recalculates the number of copies or
prints to make based on the number of sheets that have jammed.
8-10
Clearing Paper Jams
Feeder
If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow
the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display, to remove the jammed paper.
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
When removing jammed originals, take care not to cut your hands on the edges
of the originals.
1
Open the feeder cover.
imageRUNNER 5050
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
Clearing Paper Jams
8-11
Troubleshooting
imageRUNNER 5050
8
2
Remove any jammed originals.
imageRUNNER 5050
Open the inner cover, holding it by its tab.
Troubleshooting
3
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
imageRUNNER 5050
8
4
Turn the feed dial, and remove any jammed originals.
imageRUNNER 5050
8-12
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
Clearing Paper Jams
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
5
Close the inner cover.
imageRUNNER 5050
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Close the feeder cover.
Troubleshooting
6
8
imageRUNNER 5050
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
CAUTION
When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-13
7
Lift the feeder, and remove any jammed originals.
imageRUNNER 5050
Close the feeder.
Troubleshooting
8
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
imageRUNNER 5050
8
imageRUNNER 5075/5065/5055
CAUTION
When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
9
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
8-14
Clearing Paper Jams
Main Unit (Fixing Unit and Duplexing Unit)
CAUTION
The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the
machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may
result in burns or electrical shock.
1
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit or duplexing unit, a screen similar to the one
shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper
jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on
the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
8
Open the front cover of the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-15
2
Move the green lever in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise).
Troubleshooting
3
Turn the small knob in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise).
8
4
Grip the green lever, and pull out the fixing unit (Unit 1) and
duplexing unit (Unit 2).
Fixing Unit (Unit 1)
Duplexing Unit (Unit 2)
NOTE
The fixing unit and duplexing unit are pulled out together.
8-16
Clearing Paper Jams
5
Turn the upper green knob on the fixing unit in the direction of
the arrow (counterclockwise), and remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION
6
Troubleshooting
The fixing unit and its surroundings are subject to high-temperatures.
When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area,
except the jammed paper and the green knob.
Open the left cover of the fixing unit.
8
7
Turn the lower green knob on the duplexing unit in the
direction of the arrows (clockwise or counterclockwise), and
remove any jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-17
8
Close the left cover of the fixing unit.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Gently push only the fixing unit back into the machine.
Troubleshooting
9
8
CAUTION
When pushing the fixing unit back into the machine, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
10
8-18
Return the green lever to its original position.
Clearing Paper Jams
11
Lift the top left cover of the duplexing unit, and remove any
jammed paper, as shown in the illustration.
Troubleshooting
12
Remove any jammed paper that is protruding from the
duplexing unit.
8
13
Lift up the top cover of the duplexing unit, and remove any
jammed paper, and then close the top cover.
CAUTION
When closing the top cover of the duplexing unit, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-19
14
Gently push the duplexing unit back into the machine.
Troubleshooting
15
Open the lower left cover of the duplexing unit, and remove
any jammed paper, as shown in the illustration.
8
CAUTION
When pushing the duplexing unit back into the machine, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
16
Close the front cover of the main unit.
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-20
Clearing Paper Jams
17
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Stack Bypass
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside the stack bypass, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and
follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
8
1
Open the upper right cover of the main unit.
If the optional Paper Deck-AD1 or Paper Deck-AE1 is attached to the main unit,
press the release button, and move the paper deck away from the main unit
before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Paper
Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1," on p. 3-11.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-21
2
Remove any jammed paper from the stack bypass inside the
upper right cover of the main unit.
Troubleshooting
3
Remove all of the paper that is not jammed from the stack
bypass.
8
4
Gently close the upper right cover of the main unit until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
If the optional Paper Deck-AD1 or Paper-Deck-AE1 was moved away from the
main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Paper
Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1," on p. 3-11.
8-22
Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
When closing the upper right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
5
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
If a paper jam occurs inside the upper or lower right cover, a screen similar to the
one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the
paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that
appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
Inside the Upper and Lower Right Covers
8
Clearing Paper Jams
8-23
1
Open the upper right cover of the main unit.
If the optional Paper Deck-AD1 or Paper Deck-AE1 is attached to the main unit,
press the release button, and move the paper deck away from the main unit
before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Paper
Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1," on p. 3-11.
Troubleshooting
2
Remove any jammed paper.
8
3
8-24
Gently close the upper right cover of the main unit until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
When closing the upper right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Open the lower right cover of the main unit.
5
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
4
8
6
Gently close the lower right cover of the main unit until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
If the optional Paper Deck-AD1 or Paper Deck-AE1 was moved away from the
main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Paper
Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1," on p. 3-11.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-25
CAUTION
When closing the lower right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
7
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Paper Drawer 1
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside Paper Drawer 1, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and
follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
8
CAUTION
When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
8-26
Clearing Paper Jams
1
Press and release the button on Paper Drawer 1.
2
Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
If the paper drawer seems to be stuck, do not pull it out by force. Push it back
into the machine, press the release button again, and then pull it back out.
Troubleshooting
If the optional Paper Deck-AD1 or Paper Deck-AE1 is attached to the main unit,
press the release button, and move the paper deck away from the main unit
before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Paper
Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1," on p. 3-11.
8
3
Remove any jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-27
4
Gently push Paper Drawer 1 back into the machine until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Troubleshooting
5
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
8
8-28
Clearing Paper Jams
Paper Drawer 2
1
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside Paper Drawer 2, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and
follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
Press and release the button on Paper Drawer 2.
8
Clearing Paper Jams
8-29
2
Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
If the paper drawer seems to be stuck, do not pull it out by force. Push it back
into the machine, press the release button again, and then pull it back out.
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
3
8
4
Gently push Paper Drawer 2 back into the machine until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-30
Clearing Paper Jams
5
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Paper Drawers 3 and 4
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside Paper Drawer 3 or 4, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and
follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
8
1
Press and release the button on the paper drawer indicated on
the touch panel display.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-31
Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
2
8
4
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-32
Clearing Paper Jams
5
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1 (Optional)
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs in the optional paper deck, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and
follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch
panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
8
Paper Deck-AD1
Paper Deck-AE1
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-33
CAUTION
When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
IMPORTANT
If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Paper Deck-AD1 or Paper Deck-AE1, you can
remove the jammed paper by following the procedure described below. This manual uses
the Paper Deck-AD1 as an example.
Press the release button, and move the paper deck away from
the main unit.
Troubleshooting
1
2
8
8-34
Remove any jammed paper from the feeding area.
Clearing Paper Jams
Paper can also be jammed in the feeding slot on the side of the main unit.
Remove any jammed paper from the feeding slot.
3
Reconnect the paper deck to the main unit.
Troubleshooting
If the screen indicating the paper jam is no longer displayed after reconnecting
the paper deck to the main unit, proceed to step 7.
8
CAUTION
When reconnecting the paper deck to the main unit, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
4
Press the open button to open the paper deck.
The inside lifter descends automatically.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-35
IMPORTANT
If the machine is in the Sleep mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the
main power indicator is lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this
case, press the control panel power switch to reactivate the machine, and then
press the open button on the paper deck.
5
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
Look carefully, as jammed paper may be difficult to see.
6
Close the paper deck.
8
CAUTION
When closing the paper deck, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
7
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
8-36
Clearing Paper Jams
Inside the Top Cover of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle
Finisher-AD2 (Optional)
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-37
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside the top cover of the optional Finisher-AD1 or optional
Saddle Finisher-AD2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the
touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.
8
1
Open the front cover of the finisher.
If the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached to the main unit, and paper has
jammed between the puncher unit and the finisher, open the front cover of the
punch waste tray, and then open the top cover of the puncher unit to remove any
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, open the insertion unit ➞ proceed to step 2.
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
2
The Optional Finisher-AD1
Open the top cover of the finisher.
Top Cover
8
3
8-38
Remove any jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
4
Close the top cover of the finisher.
If the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached to the main unit, close the top cover
of the puncher unit and the front cover of the punch waste tray, after removing the
jammed paper.
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, close the insertion unit.
Troubleshooting
CAUTION
When closing the top cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
5
Close the front cover of the finisher.
8
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
The Optional Finisher-AD1
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
6
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-39
Output Delivery Unit of the Finisher-AD1/Saddle
Finisher-AD2 (Optional)
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs in the output delivery unit of the optional Finisher-AD1 or
optional Saddle Finisher-AD2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on
the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel
display, to remove the jammed paper.
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
8
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
8-40
Clearing Paper Jams
1
Open the output slot on the outside of the finisher, and
remove any jammed paper that is visible.
IMPORTANT
If a paper jam occurs when you are printing in the Staple mode, do not remove the
output sheets that are waiting to be stapled. (Printing and stapling resume after you
clear the paper jam.)
2
Open the front cover of the finisher.
If the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached to the main unit, and paper has
jammed between the puncher unit and the finisher, open the front cover of the
punch waste tray, and then open the top cover of the puncher unit to remove any
jammed paper.
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, open the insertion unit ➞ proceed to step 3.
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
The Optional Finisher-AD1
Clearing Paper Jams
8-41
Troubleshooting
If you cannot see any jammed paper, check if any jammed paper is stuck inside
the output area of the finisher.
8
Open the top cover of the finisher.
4
Open the delivery guide.
Troubleshooting
3
Delivery Guide
8
5
Remove any jammed paper.
If the jammed paper does not come out easily, open the entrance guide, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Entrance Guide
8-42
Clearing Paper Jams
6
Close the delivery guide.
CAUTION
When closing the delivery guide, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
Close the top cover of the finisher.
If the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached to the main unit, close the top cover
of the puncher unit and the front cover of the punch waste tray, after removing the
jammed paper.
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, close the insertion unit.
Troubleshooting
7
8
CAUTION
When closing the top cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-43
8
Close the front cover of the finisher.
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
The Optional Finisher-AD1
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Troubleshooting
9
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
8
8-44
Clearing Paper Jams
Inside the Front Cover of the Saddle Finisher-AD2
(Optional)
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside the front cover of the optional Saddle Finisher-AD2, a
screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check
the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the
procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
8
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-45
1
Open the front cover of the finisher.
If the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached to the main unit, and paper has
jammed between the puncher unit and the finisher, open the front cover of the
punch waste tray, and then open the top cover of the puncher unit to remove any
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, open the insertion unit ➞ proceed to step 2.
2
Open the top cover of the finisher.
8
8-46
Clearing Paper Jams
3
Tilt the upper delivery guide to the right, and remove any
jammed paper.
Springs are attached to the upper delivery guide, so it returns to its original
position when released.
Upper Delivery Guide
CAUTION
4
Tilt the lower delivery guide to the right, and remove any
jammed paper.
Turn the lever on the lower delivery guide to the right until it stops, and then tilt
the lower delivery guide to the right.
Lower Delivery Guide
Clearing Paper Jams
8-47
Troubleshooting
When releasing the upper delivery guide, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8
5
Return the lower delivery guide to its original position.
CAUTION
When closing the delivery guide, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
Troubleshooting
6
Close the top cover of the finisher.
If the optional Puncher Unit-AT1 is attached to the main unit, close the top cover
of the puncher unit and the front cover of the punch waste tray, after removing the
jammed paper.
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, close the insertion unit.
8
CAUTION
When closing the top cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-48
Clearing Paper Jams
7
Close the front cover of the finisher.
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional)
Troubleshooting
8
8
If a paper jam occurs inside the saddle stitcher unit of the optional Saddle
Finisher-AD2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel
display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described
below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the
jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-49
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
Troubleshooting
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
1
8
8-50
Open the front cover of the finisher.
Clearing Paper Jams
2
While pushing in the larger knob on the left, turn it in the
direction of the arrow (clockwise).
Troubleshooting
3
Turn the small knob on the right in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise).
8
4
Remove any jammed paper protruding from the saddle
stitcher unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-51
5
Tilt the lower delivery guide to the right, and remove any
jammed paper.
Turn the lever on the lower delivery guide to the right until it stops, and then tilt
the lower delivery guide to the right.
Lower Delivery Guide
Return the lower delivery guide to its original position.
Troubleshooting
6
8
CAUTION
When closing the delivery guide, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
7
8-52
Close the front cover of the finisher.
Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
If a paper jam occurs inside the insertion unit of the optional Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 or optional Document Insertion Unit-E1, a screen similar to the one
shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper
jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on
the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
Insertion Unit (Optional)
8
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-53
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine. When
an optional unit's cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge, discard punch waste, or
clear paper or staple jams, prints may still be output if other optional units are operating
normally, and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure.
NOTE
This procedure is only required when an optional finisher and the Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1 are attached to the machine.
8
1
8-54
Open the top cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
Remove all of the paper that is not jammed.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
2
4
8
Close the top cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit.
CAUTION
When closing the top cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-55
5
Open the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit.
Open the insertion unit.
7
Open the output delivery unit, and remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
8
8-56
Clearing Paper Jams
Close the output delivery unit.
9
Close the insertion unit.
Troubleshooting
8
8
CAUTION
When closing the insertion unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
10
Close the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-57
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Inside the Insertion Unit (Optional)
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside the insertion unit of the optional Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 or optional Document Insertion Unit-E1, a screen similar to the one
shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper
jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on
the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
WARNING
8
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
8-58
Clearing Paper Jams
IMPORTANT
Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine. When
an optional unit's cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge, discard punch waste, or
clear paper or staple jams, prints may still be output if other optional units are operating
normally, and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure.
NOTE
This procedure is only required when an optional finisher and the Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1 are attached to the machine.
Open the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit.
Troubleshooting
1
2
8
Open the upper delivery guide.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-59
Remove any jammed paper.
4
Close the upper delivery guide.
Troubleshooting
3
8
CAUTION
When closing the upper delivery guide, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.
5
8-60
Open the lower delivery guide.
Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper.
7
Close the lower delivery guide.
Troubleshooting
6
8
CAUTION
When closing the lower delivery guide, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8
Close the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit/
document insertion unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-61
CAUTION
When closing front cover of the document insertion/folding unit/document
insertion unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result
in personal injury.
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 (Optional)
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1, a
screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check
the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the
procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
WARNING
8
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you
cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
8-62
Clearing Paper Jams
IMPORTANT
Take care when handling the optional equipment that is attached to the machine. When
an optional unit's cover is opened to replace a staple cartridge, discard punch waste, or
clear paper or staple jams, prints may still be output if other optional units are operating
normally, and are not involved in the paper or staple jam removal procedure.
NOTE
This procedure is only required when an optional finisher and the Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-F1 are attached to the machine.
Open the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit.
2
Open the lower delivery guide.
Troubleshooting
1
8
Clearing Paper Jams
8-63
Pull out the document insertion/folding unit.
4
Push out any jammed paper toward the exit slot.
5
Remove the jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
3
8
8-64
Clearing Paper Jams
Open the left guide.
7
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
6
When there is a paper jam in the inside guide
8
When there is a paper jam in the outside guide
Clearing Paper Jams
8-65
Open the right guide.
9
Remove any jammed paper.
10
Close the right guide.
Troubleshooting
8
8
CAUTION
When closing the right guide, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
8-66
Clearing Paper Jams
11
Close the left guide.
CAUTION
When closing the left guide, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Return the document insertion/folding unit to its original
position.
Troubleshooting
12
8
CAUTION
When returning the document insertion/folding unit to its original position,
be careful not to get your hands caught, as this may result in personal
injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-67
13
Close the lower delivery guide.
CAUTION
When closing the lower delivery guide, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Close the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit.
Troubleshooting
14
8
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the document insertion/folding unit, be
careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-68
Clearing Paper Jams
Puncher Unit-AT1 (Optional)
1
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Puncher Unit-AT1, a screen similar to the
one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the
paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that
appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
Open the front cover of the punch waste tray.
8
2
Align the pointed notch on the knob within the shaded
region ( ).
Clearing Paper Jams
8-69
3
Open the top cover of the puncher unit.
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, open the insertion unit ➞ proceed to step 3.
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Close the top cover of the puncher unit.
Troubleshooting
4
8
If the optional Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1 or Document Insertion Unit-E1
is attached to the main unit, close the insertion unit.
CAUTION
When closing the top cover of the puncher unit, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-70
Clearing Paper Jams
6
Close the front cover of the punch waste tray.
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the punch waste tray, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Copy Tray-L1 (Optional)
Troubleshooting
7
8
If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Copy Tray-L1, a screen similar to the one
shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper
jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on
the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-71
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
Troubleshooting
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set
the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
NOTE
The optional Copy Tray-L1 can be attached to the machine only if no optional finisher is
attached.
1
8
8-72
Open the front cover of the main unit.
Clearing Paper Jams
2
Move the green lever in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise).
Troubleshooting
3
Turn the upper green knob in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise).
8
4
Grip the green lever, and pull out the fixing unit (Unit 1) and
duplexing unit (Unit 2).
Fixing Unit (Unit 1)
Duplexing Unit (Unit 2)
NOTE
The fixing unit and duplexing unit are pulled out together.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-73
5
Turn the upper green knob on the fixing unit in the direction of
the arrow (counterclockwise), and remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION
Troubleshooting
The fixing unit and its surroundings are subject to high-temperatures.
When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area,
except the jammed paper and the green knob.
6
Gently push the fixing unit and duplexing unit back into the
machine.
8
CAUTION
When pushing the fixing unit and duplexing unit back into the machine, be
careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-74
Clearing Paper Jams
Return the green lever to its original position.
8
Close the front cover of the main unit.
Troubleshooting
7
8
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
9
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the
touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information,
see "Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-75
Clearing Staple Jams
If a staple jam occurs, follow the procedure described below to remove the jammed
staples.
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2 (Optional)
Troubleshooting
If a staple jam occurs in the stapler unit of the optional Finisher-AD1 or optional
Saddle Finisher-AD2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the
touch panel display. Check the location of the staple jam, and follow the procedure
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove any jammed staples.
8
IMPORTANT
Make sure to close all covers and drawers of the machine before clearing any staple
jams.
1
Open the front cover of the finisher.
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
8-76
Clearing Staple Jams
The Optional Finisher-AD1
2
Push down the tab on the staple case.
Troubleshooting
3
Lift and pull out the staple case from the stapler unit, holding
it by its green tab.
8
4
Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case.
Clearing Staple Jams
8-77
5
Gently push the staple case back into the stapler unit until it is
securely in place.
Troubleshooting
6
Return the tab on the staple case to its original position.
8
7
Close the front cover of the finisher.
The Optional Saddle Finisher-AD2
The Optional Finisher-AD1
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
NOTE
If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit
automatically performs a "dry" stapling operation to reposition the staples.
8-78
Clearing Staple Jams
Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional)
IMPORTANT
• If necessary, make sure to remove all of the paper in the Booklet tray before clearing a
staple jam inside the saddle stitcher unit.
• Make sure to close all covers and drawers of the machine before clearing any staple
jams.
• This procedure is necessary only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AD2 is attached.
1
Open the front cover of the finisher.
Clearing Staple Jams
8-79
Troubleshooting
If a staple jam occurs inside the saddle stitcher unit of the optional Saddle
Finisher-AD2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel
display. Check the location of the staple jam, and follow the procedure described
below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove any
jammed staples.
8
2
Grip the saddle stitcher unit by its handle, and pull it out of the
finisher until it stops.
Saddle Stitcher Unit
3
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you,
and then push it up.
Troubleshooting
Stapler Unit of the
Saddle Stitcher Unit
8
4
8-80
Pull out the staple cartridge containing the jammed staples,
holding it by its left and right sides.
Clearing Staple Jams
5
On the staple case, push down Part A, and push up Part B.
B
A
Remove any jammed staples, and return Part B to its original
position.
Troubleshooting
6
B
8
7
Return the staple cartridge to its original position.
Clearing Staple Jams
8-81
8
Gently push the saddle stitcher unit back into its original
position.
Troubleshooting
9
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you,
and then push it down into its original position.
8
10
Close the front cover of the finisher.
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-82
Clearing Staple Jams
Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
When you have cleared the staple jam, be sure to manually reposition the staples
in the saddle stitcher unit. (See "Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning," on p. 4-59.)
8
Clearing Staple Jams
8-83
List of Error Messages
This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display,
along with possible causes and remedies.
For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see the Sending and
Facsimile Guide and Network Guide.
Self-Diagnostic Display
If the machine displays a self-diagnostic error message, follow the instructions on
the touch panel display.
Troubleshooting
Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display at the following
times:
• When
scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.
• When you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning, copying,
or printing.
• When you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the
network.
The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible
causes and remedies.
8
Load paper.
8-84
Cause 1
The machine has run out of paper. No more prints can be made.
Remedy
Load paper. (See "Paper Drawers," on p. 7-2.)
Cause 2
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted.
Remedy
Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go. (See "Paper Drawers," on p. 7-2.)
List of Error Messages
Load LTR size paper.
Cause
The optimum paper size selected by the Automatic Paper Selection mode is not
available in the machine.
Remedy 1 Load the indicated paper size into the machine. If you press (Start) while this
message is displayed, prints are made with the currently selected paper size.
Remedy 2 If the message continues to be displayed even if the indicated paper size is
loaded, set Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) for that paper drawer to 'On'. (See "Auto Paper
Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 4-31.)
Cause
Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the feeder.
Remedy
Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top. Place the originals
back into the feeder's original supply tray, and press
(Start).
Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key. (Data for the scanned original has
exceeded limits on the size that can be handled by this machine. Automatically adjust
settings and try again.)
Cause
Remedy
Scanning has stopped because the data size of the scanned original exceeds
the maximum data size that the machine can handle.
Try scanning the original again from the first page. If scanning is still not
possible, reduce the Sharpness mode setting, and select [Text] for the original
type.
Scanning has stopped because the size of the data for the scanned original exceeds the
limit. Scanning may be possible if [Sharpness] is reduced and the type of original is set to
[Text].
Cause
Scanning has stopped because the data size of the scanned original exceeds
the maximum data size that the machine can handle.
Remedy
Reduce the Sharpness mode setting, and select [Text] for the original type.
Remove the paper from the output tray.
Cause
Prints from the previous job remain in the output tray.
Remedy
Remove the prints from the output tray. Printing automatically resumes.
List of Error Messages
8-85
Troubleshooting
Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key.
8
Remove the paper from the booklet tray.
Cause
Prints from the previous job remain in the Booklet tray of the optional Saddle
Finisher-AD2.
Remedy
Remove the prints from the Booklet tray. Printing automatically resumes.
Replace toner cartridge.
Cause
Printing is not possible because the toner has run out.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p. 7-45.)
Troubleshooting
Place the original on the platen glass.
Cause
The specified mode requires that the original be placed on the platen glass, but
there is no original on the platen glass.
Remedy
Place the original on the platen glass.
Remove the original from the platen glass.
8
Cause
An original remains on the platen glass.
Remedy
Remove the original from the platen glass, and place the new original.
Remove the original from the feeder.
Cause
The machine cannot scan your original using the feeder. An original is placed in
the feeder and on the platen glass.
Remedy
Remove the original from the feeder.
Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty.
8-86
Cause
The feeder's scanning area is dirty.
Remedy
Clean the feeder's scanning area. (See "Manual Feeder Cleaning," on p. 7-52.)
List of Error Messages
List of Error Codes without Messages
If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and
perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can
check the error code on the Details screen when you press [Log] on the System
Monitor screen. (See "Job Details," on p. 5-10.)
If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is
printed in the Results column on the Activity Report and Send Report. However, if a
send job is canceled, "STOP" is printed in the Results column on the Send Report.
(See Chapter 12, "Printing Communication Reports," in the Sending and Facsimile
Guide.)
Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code.
Cause 1
Differently sized originals were scanned, and the Different Size Originals mode
was not set.
Remedy
Place your originals, specify the Different Size Originals mode, and try scanning
again.
Cause 2
Differently sized originals were scanned in the 2-Sided mode, and the Different
Size Originals mode was not set.
Remedy
Place your originals, specify the 2-Sided and Different Size Originals modes,
and try scanning again.
# 009
Cause 1
There is no paper.
Remedy
Load paper. (See "Paper Drawers," on p. 7-2.)
Cause 2
The paper drawer is not inserted correctly into the machine.
Remedy
Insert the paper drawer properly. (See "Paper Drawers," on p. 7-2.)
# 037
Cause
Documents could not be received because there was insufficient memory
available.
Remedy
Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to
increase the amount of available memory. (See Chapter 2, "Introduction to the
Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide, and Chapter 6,
"Receiving Documents," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
List of Error Messages
8-87
Troubleshooting
# 001
8
# 099
Cause
Copying/printing was interrupted.
Remedy
Try copying/printing again.
Troubleshooting
# 701
Cause 1
The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.
Remedy
Enter the correct Department ID or password using
the control panel, and try again.
Cause 2
The Department ID or password was changed while the machine was
processing a job.
Remedy
Change the Department ID and password, and try again. If you do not know the
password, contact your System Manager.
Cause 3
<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is set to 'Off'.
Remedy
Set <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is set to 'On'. (See "Accepting Print
and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs," on p. 6-16.)
-
(numeric keys) on
# 703
8
Cause
The hard disk is full, and no more images can be scanned.
Remedy 1 Wait a few moments, and try scanning again after the current send jobs
complete.
Remedy 2 Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate
normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See "Main Power and
Control Panel Power," on p. 1-16.)
# 711
8-88
Cause
The inbox memory is full.
Remedy
Erase unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See Chapter 2,
"Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide,
and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
List of Error Messages
# 712
Cause
The maximum number of documents are already stored in the inbox.
Remedy
Erase unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See Chapter 2,
"Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide,
and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
# 749
Cause
You could not execute the job because a service call message is being
displayed.
Remedy
Turn the main power OFF, wait for 10 or more seconds, and then turn the main
power back ON. If the machine still does not work normally, turn the main power
OFF, disconnect the machine, and then contact your local authorized Canon
dealer. (See "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on p. 1-16.)
Cause
An error occurred while sending the URL of a User Inbox.
Remedy
Contact your System Manager.
Troubleshooting
#759
# 816
8
Cause
You cannot print because the set page limit total has been reached.
Remedy
Contact your System Manager.
# 817
Cause
A communication error occurred between your machine and remote copy
printers.
Remedy
Check the network, and try again. If communication errors continue, contact
your system manager.
# 823
Cause
Unable to connect with the remote copy printers.
Remedy
Check the network, and try again. If the machine still does not operate correctly,
contact your system manager.
List of Error Messages
8-89
# 824
Cause
A communication error occurred with the remote copy printers.
Remedy
Check the network, and try again. If the machine still does not operate correctly,
contact your system manager.
Troubleshooting
# 825
Cause 1
The Department ID and password set on the host machine do not match those
registered in the remote copy printers.
Remedy
Register your Department ID and password in the remote copy printers, or use
a remote copy printer in which your Department ID and password are
registered.
Cause 2
Reserved or current print jobs cannot be performed in the remote copy printer
because the Department ID and password have been deleted, or the password
has been changed.
Remedy
Contact your System Manager, or make sure that the Department ID and
password set in the host machine match the ones registered in the remote copy
printer.
# 849
8
Cause
Device information could not be delivered because the client machine is
processing a job.
Remedy
Try delivering device information again after the client machine finishes
processing the job.
# 850
Cause
Device information could not be delivered because a screen relating to the
delivered device information is being displayed.
Remedy
Try delivering the device information again after the screen is cleared from the
client machine. (See "Checking/Printing the Communication Log," on p. 6-52.)
# 851
8-90
Cause 1
There is insufficient memory remaining in the system.
Remedy
Check the system's available memory, and delete any unnecessary documents
stored in inboxes. (See Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions" in
the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
List of Error Messages
Cause 2
The machine's memory is full.
Remedy
Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to
increase the amount of available memory. (See Chapter 2, "Introduction to the
Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide, and Chapter 6,
"Receiving Documents," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
Cause 3
The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 2,000
documents in the specified inbox.
Remedy
If there are a large number of documents, delete the unnecessary ones from
the specified inbox. (See Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions" in
the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Cause
An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job
was being processed.
Remedy
Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job
again, if necessary. (See "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on p. 1-16.)
# 853
Cause 1
When trying to print a large number of pages, the job is not performed due to
insufficient memory resources.
Remedy
Reduce the number of pages to print, or perform the print job again when no
other jobs are reserved.
Cause 2
The job could not be processed, because it was canceled from the printer driver
while the print data was being sent to the machine.
Remedy
Try printing again.
Cause 3
The spool memory is full when Use Spooler in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', therefore, data
received from the host could not be spooled.
Remedy
Set Use Spooler in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'Off', and try sending the print data again. (See Chapter 3,
"Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Cause 4
The maximum amount of data that can be received has been exceeded. (See
Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents," in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
Remedy
Try printing the documents again after all current jobs are complete. If you still
cannot print, check the sent data.
List of Error Messages
8-91
Troubleshooting
# 852
8
Cause 5
The number of secured documents exceeded the maximum limit that can be
reserved at a time.
Remedy
Print or erase the secured documents that are stored in the machine, and try
printing again.
# 854
Cause
Device information could not be delivered because the client machine has
Restrictions for Receiving Device Info. in Device Information Delivery Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'.
Remedy
Try delivering device information again after setting Restrictions for Receiving
Device Info. in Device Information Delivery Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
Troubleshooting
# 855
Cause
Device information could not be delivered because a language that the client
machine cannot handle was included in the device information.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
# 856
8
Cause
The job was canceled because there was not enough free space on the hard
disk to store the temporary data.
Remedy
Contact your System Manager.
# 857
Cause
Data reception timed out, or the job was canceled at the host.
Remedy
Check that the network is functioning properly, and then try printing again.
# 858
8-92
Cause
There is a problem with the print data sent from an external application.
Remedy
Check the settings of the data sent to the machine, make sure they are
compatible with the machine, and try sending the data again.
List of Error Messages
# 859
Cause 1
A compression error occurred with the image data.
Remedy
Check the print settings, and try printing again.
Cause 2
An original was not scanned properly, or the orientation of the original was
incorrect.
Remedy
Check the scan settings, and try scanning again.
Cause 1
A paper jam occurred during printing.
Remedy
Try printing again.
Cause 2
Recovery printing was not performed.
Remedy
Try printing again.
Cause 3
You tried to print on a transparency sheet made for color copies.
Remedy
Load transparencies made for black-and-white copies into the machine and
then try printing again.
# 861
Troubleshooting
# 860
8
Cause
An error occurred while processing PDL data or image data.
Remedy
Confirm the print settings you made when printing from a computer.
# 862
Cause 1
The saddle finisher trays have exceeded their stacking limits.
Remedy
Change the print data or print settings, and try printing again.
Cause 2
A combination of settings which is not supported was set.
Remedy
Change the print data or print settings, and try printing again.
Cause 3
Image data or data which is not guaranteed to be compatible was printed.
Remedy
Change the print data or print settings, and try printing again.
List of Error Messages
8-93
# 863
Cause
An error occurred while processing PDL data or image data.
Remedy
Check the settings, and try printing again.
# 865
The Mail Box function is restricted.
Remedy
Contact your System Manager.
Troubleshooting
Cause
8
8-94
List of Error Messages
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
If memory becomes full during the scanning of originals, the following screens
appear on the touch panel display.
NOTE
The machine's memory can store approximately 20,250 pages of scanned images.
Approximately 20,000 pages of that total is shared by the various functions, including the
Copy, Print, and Mail Box functions. In addition, each function is guaranteed to be able to
store the following number of pages:
100 pages
100 pages (excluding Secured Print jobs)
50 pages
For example, the Copy function can store up to 20,100 pages of scanned images.
100 + 20,000 = 20,100 pages (approximate figures)
However, the number of pages that the machine's memory can store may differ,
depending on the amount of memory required for documents stored in inboxes and jobs
that are in the print queue.
Troubleshooting
Copy:
Print:
Others:
8
1
Follow this procedure:
● If the message asking whether to print the pages scanned into
memory appears:
❑ Select [Yes], [No], or [Another Function].
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
8-95
Details of each item are shown below.
[Yes]:
The pages scanned into memory are printed. When
printing is complete, scan the remaining originals.
[No]:
The pages scanned into memory are not printed.
[Another Function]: Select to use another function that is not being used (If
the desired function is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired function.) ➞ press [Done].
Troubleshooting
● If the screen shown below appears:
❑ Select [Cancel] or [Another Function].
8
8-96
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
Details of each item are shown below.
[Cancel]:
The current job is canceled, and the display returns to
the Basic Features screen. Scan the job again when the
current job is complete.
Troubleshooting
[Another Function]: Select to use another function that is not being used (If
the desired function is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired function.) ➞ press [Done].
8
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning
8-97
Service Call Message
If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, a screen like the
one shown below is displayed. Follow the instructions that appear on the touch
panel display.
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer
Troubleshooting
If a message like the one shown below appears, follow the procedure described
below.
8
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result
in electrical shock.
CAUTION
Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on
the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the
power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
If you turn OFF the main power switch when there is a job waiting to print, that job is
erased.
8-98
Service Call Message
1
Press [Shutdown] to turn the main power switch OFF.
IMPORTANT
For instructions on shutting down the machine, see "Shutting Down the Machine,"
on p. 1-21.
Wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power switch
back ON.
( side)
3
( I side)
Troubleshooting
2
If the machine still does not operate normally, follow the
procedure below, and then contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
8
❑ Turn OFF the main power switch.
❑ Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
NOTE
When you contact your local authorized Canon dealer, have the following
information available:
- Product name
- Details of the malfunction
- The error code displayed on the touch panel display
Service Call Message
8-99
Setting the Limited Functions Mode from the Service Call
Message Screen
If the Service Call Message screen appears indicating a malfunction of a Finishing
mode, you can clear it by turning Limited Functions Mode 'On' to temporarily limit
the use of the finishing modes. However, after the Limited Functions Mode is
deactivated, the Service Call Message screen may appear again, unless the cause
of the malfunction is removed.
IMPORTANT
If you turn OFF the main power switch when there is a job waiting to print, that job is
erased.
Troubleshooting
NOTE
If you set Limited Functions Mode to 'On' from the Service Call Message screen, Limited
Functions Mode in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is also set to
'On'. (See "Limiting Functions," on p. 4-54.)
1
Press [Limited Fnctns Mode].
8
8-100
Service Call Message
2
Press [Yes].
A message prompting you to press [Shutdown] and to turn the main power switch
OFF and ON appears.
4
Press [Shutdown] to turn the main power switch OFF.
Wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power switch
back ON.
( side)
( I side)
Troubleshooting
3
8
( side)
( I side)
The machine starts up in the Limited Functions Mode.
Service Call Message
8-101
When the Power Does Not Turn ON
If you cannot operate the machine, even though the main power switch and the
control panel power switch are both turned ON, always check that the breaker is not
in the OFF position.
If the breaker is in the OFF position, contact your local authorized Canon dealer
without turning the breaker back ON.
ON
Troubleshooting
( side)
OFF
(
side)
WARNING
If the breaker is in the OFF position, do not switch the current leakage breaker
back ON. Doing so may lead to a fire, electrical shock, smoke, or the tripping of
other breakers in the facility.
8
8-102
When the Power Does Not Turn ON
Appendix
9
CHAPTER
This chapter provides other useful information.
Sample Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Copy Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Print Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Device Information Delivery Destination List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Device Information Communication Log Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Number of Enterable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Capacity of Various Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart . . . . . . 9-11
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9-1
Sample Reports
Copy Log List
The copy log list contains information about past copy jobs. You can print a copy log
list from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Copy/Print Log," on p. 5-12.)
10/12/2006 THU 15:30
iR 5075
001
*************************
*** COPY LOG LIST ***
*************************
D EPT. I D : 8253
JO B N O.
Appendix
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0022
0023
0030
9
TI ME
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
07/03
10:48
11:36
11:38
11:46
11:50
13:07
13:11
20:29
20:30
20:35
20:48
20:56
20:59
SHEE T x C OPIE S
5x1
2x20
2x19
3x1
3x19
6x20
7x19
9x1
4x1
16x1
7x19
9x1
4x1
DE V IC E NA M E
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
LO C A L
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
C OPY
R E S ULT
OK
NG S TO P
OK
OK
OK
NG S TO P
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG S TO P
OK
■ DEPT. ID
If a Department ID is set, it is listed at the top of the log. Copy logs are printed for each
Department ID.
■ JOB NO.
Prints the four digit number which is automatically assigned to a copy job that is accepted.
NOTE
If a user was authenticated by a login service such as SSO or SDL, the user's name will
be displayed on the line below the JOB NO.
■ TIME
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) when a copy job was completed.
■ SHEET x COPIES
Prints the number of pages in each copy set and the number of sets made.
9-2
Sample Reports
■ DEVICE NAME
Prints the name of the device that performed the copy.
Prints "LOCAL COPY" if the copy job was performed on this machine, "CASCADE COPY"
if the job was a cascade copy job, or the name of the output destination if the job was a
remote copy job.
■ RESULT
Prints "OK" or "NG."
"OK" is printed when the copy job completes successfully.
"NG" (No Good) is printed if an error occurs during the copy job. The error code or "STOP"
is also printed next to "NG."
Print Log List
The print log list contains information about past print jobs. You can print the print
log list from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Copy/Print Log," on p.
5-12.)
10/12/2006 THU 15:30
iR 5075
001
Appendix
****************************************
PRI N T LOG LIS T (PR INTE R )
****************************************
****************************************
DEPT. I D : 8251
JO B N O.
5001
5003
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5010
5034
5035
TI ME
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
05/03
11:48
11:36
11:38
11:46
11:50
13:07
13:11
20:29
20:30
20:35
20:48
JOB N AM E
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
UtilityPrint
US E R
Nick
A d ministra to r
S yste m
S yste m
S yste m
S yste m
S yste m
S yste m
S yste m
S yste m
S yste m
S HE E T x C OPIE
1 x1
4 x1
1 x5
5 x9
3 x5
2 x4
1 x9
1 x5
1 x5
1 x4
1 x9
R E S ULT
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
9
■ DEPT. ID
If a Department ID is set, it is listed at the top of the log. Print logs are printed for each
Department ID.
■ JOB NO.
Prints the four digit number which is automatically assigned to a print job that is accepted.
■ TIME
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) when a print job was completed.
Sample Reports
9-3
■ JOB NAME
Prints the name of the printed document, or the type of print job.
■ USER
Prints the name of the user who sent the print job to the machine.
■ SHEET x COPIE
Prints the number of pages in each copy set and the number of sets made.
■ RESULT
Prints "OK" or "NG."
"OK" is printed when the print job completes successfully.
"NG" (No Good) is printed if an error occurs during the print job. The error code or "STOP"
is also printed next to "NG."
Device Information Delivery Destination List
Appendix
The Device Information Delivery Destination List contains information about
registered delivery destinations. You can print this list from Register Destinations
under Transmitting Settings in Device Information Delivery Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Printing the Delivery
Destinations," on p. 6-44.)
10/12/2006 THU 13:58
iR 5075
001
*******************************************************************
D EVI CE I N FO RMATI ON D E LIV E R Y DE S TINA TION LIS T
*******************************************************************
*******************************************************************
9
D ESTI N ATI O N
D EST. RECEI VABLE D A TA A UTO DE LIV E R Y A UTO D E LIV E R Y DA TA
111. 11. 111. 111
-
O ff
222. 22. 222. 222
-
O ff
333. 33. 333. 333
-
O ff
DE PT. ID
A D D R E S S B OOK
DE PT. ID
A D D R E S S B OOK
DE PT. ID
A D D R E S S B OOK
■ DESTINATION
The IP addresses of the registered destination machines are printed.
■ DEST. RECEIVABLE DATA
The data receivable at the registered destinations is printed.
9-4
Sample Reports
■ AUTO DELIVERY
"On" is printed if Auto Delivery Settings in Transmitting Settings in Device Information
Delivery Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set for the
registered destination. "Off" is printed if Auto Delivery Settings are not set for the
registered destination.
■ AUTO DELIVERY DATA
The data that is delivered automatically is printed if Auto Delivery Settings in Transmitting
Settings in Device Information Delivery Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) are set for the destination.
Device Information Communication Log Report
The Device Information Communication Log Report contains information about
device information that has been delivered and received. You can select to print the
Device Information Communication Log Report manually or automatically.
You can also select to either print the Communication Log after the number of send
and receive transmissions reaches 100, or specify to print it at a specified time. For
more information, see "Checking/Printing the Communication Log," on p. 6-52.
10/12/2006 THU 13:58
iR 5075
001
START TIME END TIME
TYPE
TO/FROM
*02/06 14:04
0 2 / 0 6 1 4 : 0 4 DELIVER
1 1 1. 11. 111. 111
*02/06 14:05
0 2 / 0 6 1 4 : 0 6 DELIVER
2 2 2. 22. 222. 222
DATA CONTENT
Appendix
*********************************************************************
DEVICE INFORMATION COMMUNICATION LOG REPORT
*********************************************************************
*********************************************************************
RESULT
ADD.FUNCTNS SET.VALUE NG
DE PT. I D
NG
ADDRESS BOOK
NG
#754
#754
#754
9
■ START TIME
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) when device information communication
started. (An asterisk (*) indicates that a report has already been printed.)
■ END TIME
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) when device information delivery/reception
completed.
■ TYPE
Displays whether the device information was delivered or received.
■ TO/FROM
Prints the delivery destination if the device information was delivered.
Prints the delivery source if the device information was received.
Sample Reports
9-5
■ CONTENT
Prints the device information that was delivered/received.
■ RESULT
Prints "OK" if the communication was completed successfully, or "NG" (No Good) if there
was a communication error.
Appendix
If an error occurred during communication, the error code is also printed.
9
9-6
Sample Reports
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of
Various Functions
Number of Enterable Characters
Additional Functions
Common Settings Register Form
for Form
Composition
Register
Characters for
Page No./
Watermark
Communications
Settings
Characters
32 characters maximum
System Manager System Manager
Settings
E-mail Address
32 characters maximum
64 characters maximum
Contact Information
32 characters maximum
Comment
32 characters maximum
Device Name
32 characters maximum
Location
32 characters maximum
Communications E-mail/I-Fax Default
Settings
Settings
Subject
40 characters maximum
9
Forwarding
Settings
Condition Name
50 characters maximum
Send Doc. Name
24 characters maximum
Register LDAP
Server
Server Name
24 characters maximum
Server Address
48 characters maximum
Location to Start
Search
128 characters
maximum
Register Inbox Name
24 characters maximum
Confidential Fax Register Inbox Name
Inboxes Settings
24 characters maximum
TX Settings
(Common
Settings)
Sender's Names (TTI)
24 characters maximum
Unit Name
24 characters maximum
Device
Information
Settings
Mail Box Settings
24 characters maximum
Appendix
System Settings
Form Name
User Inboxes
Settings
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
9-7
Additional Functions
Address Book
Settings
E-mail
I-Fax
Fax
Appendix
File
9
Group
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
E-mail Address
128 characters
maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
I-Fax Address
128 characters
maximum
Standard Field 1
40 characters maximum
Standard Field 2
16 characters maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
Fax Number
120 digits maximum
Subaddress
20 digits maximum
Password
20 digits maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
Host Name
128 characters
maximum
Folder Path
255 characters
maximum
User
FTP, IPX:
24 characters maximum
SMB, WebDAV:
128 characters
maximum
Password
FTP, IPX, WebDAV:
24 characters maximum
SMB: 14 characters
maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
*One-touch Button Name can be entered only when you are setting the One-touch Buttons.
Copy Functions
Mode Memory
9-8
Register Name
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
10 characters maximum
Mail Box Functions
Document Name
Mode Memory
24 characters maximum
Register Name
10 characters maximum
Sending Functions
Scanning Mode
Register Name
(8 characters maximum)x2
Send Settings
Send Doc. Name
24 characters maximum
Subject
40 characters maximum
Message
140 characters maximum
Capacity of Various Functions
System Settings
System Manager
Settings
System Manager ID
7 digits maximum
System Password
7 digits maximum
Dept. ID
Management
Dept. ID
7 digits maximum
Password
7 digits maximum
Page Limits
0-999999
Communications
Settings
Mail Box Settings
Communications
Settings
Address Book
Settings
Memory
RX Inbox
Settings
Appendix
Additional Functions
Memory
7 digits
RX Inbox
Password
Date & Time Settings
Year, Month, day, hour
User Inbox
Number of Inboxes
100
Password
7 digits
Confidential Fax
Inbox
Number of Inboxes
50
TX Settings
(Common
Settings)
Sender's
Names
(TTI)
User Settings
(Fax Settings)
Unit Telephone #
Number
99
of Names
20 digits maximum
Address Book Password
7 digits maximum
Address Book Capacity
1600 destinations
One-touch Button Capacity
200 destinations
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
9-9
9
Copy Functions
Mode Memory
Number of Keys
9
Reserving Copy Jobs
Number of Jobs
10 jobs
Mail Box Functions
Mode Memory
Number of Keys
9
Reserving Print Jobs
Number of Jobs
32 jobs
Sending Documents
Number of Documents
32 documents maximum
Number of Pages
999 pages maximum
Sending/Facsimile Functions
Scanning Mode
Number of keys
8
Reserving Send Jobs
E-mail
I-Fax
File
Inbox
120 jobs
Fax
64 jobs
Number of pages
999 pages maximum
Appendix
Send Jobs
9
9-10
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
Relationship between Original Orientation and
Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Please use this chart when printing on preprinted paper (i.e., paper with logos or
letterheads).
Appendix
NOTE
If you want to copy on the back side of preprinted paper, place the side you want to
copy on:
- face down when using a paper drawer
- face up when using the stack bypass or an optional paper deck
9
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
9-11
■ If You Want to Set Right Side Stapling:
Staple
Position
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Top
Corner: Top Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Confidential
Output
Example
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Confidential
11" x 17", LGL
LTR
LTR
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in
Paper
Drawers 1 and 2
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face down
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in
Paper
Drawers 3 and 4
laitnedifnoC
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face up
Confidential
Orientation in stack
bypass/paper deck
Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face down
Confidential
Preprinted Paper
11" x 17", LGL
Orientation on
the platen glass
Original
Appendix
Original side:
Face down
9
Staple position
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Bottom Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up
Staple position
Auto Orientation Setting
9-12
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to
'On' when paper
orientation in the paper
deck/stack bypass/
paper drawer is
vertical.)
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Either On or Off
■ If You Want to Set Left Side Stapling:
Staple
Position
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Corner: Top Left
Double: Top
Corner: Top Left
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Confidential
Output
Example
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Confidential
LTR
11" x 17", LGL
LTR
11" x 17", LGL
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in
Paper
Drawers 1 and 2
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in
Paper
Drawers 3 and 4
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Preprinted side:
Face down
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Orientation in stack
bypass/paper deck
Confidential
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted side:
Face down
Preprinted side:
Face up
Original
Original side:
Face down
Staple position
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Left
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Orientation in
the feeder
9
Original side:
Face up
Staple position
Auto Orientation Setting
Appendix
Orientation on
the platen glass
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Either On or Off
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Left
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to
'On' when paper
orientation in the paper
deck/stack bypass/
paper drawer is
vertical.)
Either On or Off
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
9-13
■ If You Do Not Want to Set the Staple Mode:
Confidential
Output
Example
Confidential
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
LTR
11" x 17", LGL
LTR
Confidential
laitnedifnoC
Confidential
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in
Paper
Drawers 3 and 4
laitnedifnoC
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted side:
Face down
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Orientation in stack
bypass/paper deck
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face up
11" x 17", LGL
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in
Paper
Drawers 1 and 2
Preprinted side:
Face down
Confidential
Confidential
Original
Appendix
Orientation on
the platen glass
9
Original side:
Face down
Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up
Auto Orientation Setting
9-14
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to
'On' when paper
orientation in the paper
deck/stack bypass/
paper drawer is
vertical.)
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Either On or Off
Index
A
Auto Drawer Switching, 2-18, 4-31
Additional Functions
Auto Online, 6-21
Auto Offline, 6-21
Address Book Settings, 4-24
Auto Orientation, 2-20
Adjustment/Cleaning, 4-11
Auto Paper Selection, 4-31
Common Settings, 4-7
Auto Sleep mode, 2-12
Communications Settings, 4-21
Auto Sleep Time, 4-56
Copy Settings, 4-20
Mail Box Settings, 4-24
Report Settings, 4-13
B
System Settings, 4-14
Timer Settings, 4-11
Additional Functions key, 1-15
Additional Functions screen, 2-10, 4-6
Breaker
About the breaker, 1-12
Brightness, adjusting, 2-23
Adjusting/Cleaning the machine
Appendix
Address Book Settings, 4-24
Adjustment/Cleaning, 4-11, 4-59
C
Automatic feeder cleaning, 4-65
Card Reader-C1
Character/Background Contrast Adjustment,
4-62
Creep (Displacement) Correction Adjustment,
4-61
Drum Cleaning, 4-66
Exposure Recalibration, 4-62
Fold Placement Adjustment, 4-61
After using the machine, 3-33
Before using the machine, 3-32
Department ID Management, 3-33
Character/Background Contrast Adjustment,
4-62
Cleaning
Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method, 4-67
Automatic feeder cleaning, 7-58
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment, 4-60
Cleaning the original scanning area, 7-60
Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning, 4-59
Cleaning the machine, 7-50
Zoom Fine Adjustment, 4-59
Drum Cleaning, 7-59
Wire Cleaning, 4-66
Manual feeder cleaning, 7-52
Allow Secured Print from Print Status Screen,
6-31
9
About the Card Reader-C1, 3-3, 3-31
Platen glass and underside of feeder, 7-51
Wire Cleaning, 7-59
Auto Clear, 2-18
Clear key, 1-15
Auto Clear Time, 4-57
Clip holder, 1-14
Index
9-15
Common Settings
About Common Settings, 4-7, 4-26
Toner, 7-68
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,
Control panel
Changing the language shown on touch panel
display, 4-48
Cleaning the original scanning area prompt,
4-53
About the control panel, 1-11
Control panel power switch, 1-14
Parts and their functions, 1-14
Power, 1-16, 1-21
Control panel power switch, 1-14, 1-16, 1-21
Default display after Auto Clear, 4-29
Copy function, 2-2
Display Remaining Paper Message, 4-30
Copy key, 2-7
Energy consumption in the Sleep mode, 4-37
Copy log list, 9-2
Energy Saver mode, 4-36
Copy Settings, 4-20
Identifying the type of paper in a paper source,
Copy Tray-L1
4-33
Image forms, 4-41
About the Copy Tray-L1, 3-3, 3-29
Clearing paper jams, 8-71
Inch entry, 4-31
Copying, definition, xvi
Initial function at power ON, 4-26
Counter check, 5-2
Inserting a job separation sheet between copy
Counter check key, 1-14
sets, 4-51
Appendix
Stamp Cartridge, 7-68
Alternating the print output (offset jobs), 4-49
4-31
9
Paper stock, 7-67
Creep (Displacement) Correction Adjustment,
4-61
Inserting a job separation sheet between print
jobs, 4-50
Limited Functions Mode, 4-54
LTRR/STMT Original Selection, 4-38
Offset jobs, 4-49
Output tray designation, 4-39
Paper Select Screen Priority, 4-35
Printing priority setting, 4-40
Returning Common Settings to defaults, 4-55
Reversing the contrast of the touch panel
display, 4-49
Standard mode for local printing, 4-47
Standard paper for the stack bypass, 4-46
Tone settings, 4-30
Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output, 4-54
User-defined text for page numbers and
watermarks, 4-44
Communications Settings, 4-21
Consumables
9-16
Index
D
Daily timer, 2-12
Date and time settings, 6-23
Department ID and password, entering, 2-26
Department ID Management
About Department ID Management, 3-33, 6-5
Changing the password and page limit, 3-36,
6-10
Checking and printing counter information,
3-41, 6-14
Clearing page totals, 3-43, 6-15
Erasing the Department ID and password, 6-12
Print and scan jobs with unknown ID, 3-43,
6-16
Registering the Department ID, password, and
page limit, 6-7
Device Information Settings, 6-19
Original supply tray, 1-14
Display contrast dial, 1-15
Slide guide, 1-14
Display Remaining Paper Message, 4-30
Feeder cleaning, 4-65
Display Status Before Authentication, 6-30
Finisher-AD1
Displays used in this manual, xiv
About Finisher-AD1, 3-3, 3-13
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1
Clearing paper jams, 8-37, 8-40
Clearing staple jams, 8-76
About Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1,
Finishing modes, 3-16
3-3, 3-13
Clearing paper jams, 8-53, 8-58, 8-62
Forced Secure Watermark, 6-60
Loading paper, 7-42
Fold Placement Adjustment, 4-61
Document Insertion Unit-E1
Function Display Settings, 4-26
About Document Insertion Unit-E1, 3-3, 3-13
Clearing paper jams, 8-53, 8-58
Loading paper, 7-42
Drum Cleaning, 4-66, 7-59
H
Handling precautions, 1-6
Heavy paper, 2-52
E
Help key, 1-15
Help Menu, 2-15
Edit pen, 1-14
Energy Saver key, 1-14
Energy Saver mode, 2-11, 4-36
Entering characters from the touch panel display
Alphanumeric characters, 2-24
Values in inches, 2-25
Error indicator, 1-14
Error messages
Error codes without messages, 8-87
Self-diagnostic display, 8-84
Exposure Recalibration, 4-62
Appendix
Encrypted Print Settings, 6-57
I
ID (Log In/Out) key, 1-15
Illustrations used in this manual, xv
9
Image forms
Checking, 4-43
Erasing, 4-44
Storing, 4-41
Inch entry, 4-31
Installation
Location and handling, 1-2
Power supply, 1-5
F
Precautions, 1-2
Fax function, 2-3
Feeder
Clearing paper jams, 8-11
Feeder parts and functions, 1-13
Original output area, 1-14
J
Job details
Checking copy/print job details, 5-10
Printing copy/print log, 5-12
Index
9-17
Job Duration Display, 4-52
Job status, checking, 5-4
Job/Print status display area, 2-7
Replacing the toner cartridges, 7-45
MEAP
About MEAP, 2-9
Default Authentication, 2-9
Installing application, 2-9
K
License management, 2-9
Keys used in this manual, xiv
Logging on, 2-29
Printing installed application information, 6-34
SDL, 2-9
SSO, 2-9
L
Uninstalling application, 2-9
License Registration, 6-25
Loading paper
Use HTTP server, 6-33
Message boards
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1, 7-42
Clearing, 6-20
Document Insertion Unit-E1, 7-42
Message in job/print status display area, 2-18
Paper Deck-AD1, 7-20
Types of message boards, 2-17
Paper Deck-AE1, 7-20
Messages from the System Manager, reading,
2-17
Paper drawers, 7-2
Stack bypass, 2-42
Moving machine, 1-5
Appendix
Multifunctional operations, 2-50
M
9
Mail Box key, 2-7
Mail Box function, 2-2
N
Numeric keys, 1-15
Mail Box Settings, 4-24
Main power indicator, 1-14
Main power switch, 1-16, 1-21
Maintenance
Loading paper (Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-F1/Document Insertion Unit-E1), 7-42
Loading paper (Paper Deck-AD1/Paper
Deck-AE1), 7-20
Loading paper (paper drawers), 7-2
Removing punch waste, 7-39
Replacing the stamp cartridge, 7-17
Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle
stitcher unit, 7-36
Replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler
unit, 7-32
9-18
Index
O
Optional equipment
Card Reader-C1, 3-3, 3-31
Configuration, 3-2
Copy Tray-L1, 3-3, 3-29
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1, 3-3, 3-13
Document Insertion Unit-E1, 3-3, 3-13
Finisher-AD1, 3-3, 3-13
Paper Deck-AD1, 3-3, 3-11
Paper Deck-AE1, 3-3, 3-11
Puncher Unit-AT1, 3-3, 3-13
Saddle Finisher-AD2, 3-3, 3-13
Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method, 4-67
Paper size, 2-53
Output tray designation, 4-39
Paper type, 2-52
Overview, 2-6
Paper supply indicator, 2-19
Paper Type Management Settings, 6-67
Parts and functions of the main unit
P
Control Panel, 1-14
About Paper Deck-AD1, 3-3, 3-11, 7-20
Clearing paper jams, 8-33
Loading paper, 7-20
Paper Deck-AE1
About Paper Deck-AE1, 3-3, 3-11, 7-20
Clearing paper jams, 8-33
Loading Paper, 7-20
Paper drawers
About the paper drawers, 7-2
Adjusting to hold different paper size, 7-8
Clearing paper jams, 8-26, 8-29, 8-31
Loading paper, 7-2
Paper jams
Copy Tray-L1, 8-71
Clearing, 8-4
Document Insertion/Folding Unit-F1, 8-53,
8-58, 8-62
Document Insertion Unit-E1, 8-53, 8-58
Feeder, 8-11
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2, 8-37, 8-40,
8-45, 8-49
Main Unit, 8-15
Paper Deck-AD1/Paper Deck-AE1, 8-33
Paper drawers, 8-26, 8-29, 8-31
External view, 1-10
Feeder, 1-13
Internal view, 1-12
PDL Selection (PnP), 6-72
Power conservation
About power conservation, 2-11
Auto Sleep mode, 2-12
Daily Timer, 2-12
Energy Saver mode, 2-11
Power supply, 1-5
Print function, 2-4
Print Job Screen, 5-8
Printer Driver Secure Watermark, 6-63
Print jobs
Canceling, 2-13
Appendix
Paper Deck-AD1
Changing, 2-13
Checking, 2-13
Print log list, 9-3
9
Printing priority, 4-40, 5-14
Printing, definition, xvi
Processing/Data indicator, 1-15
Puncher Unit-AT1
About Puncher Unit-AT1, 3-3, 3-13
Clearing paper jams, 8-69
Removing punch waste, 7-39
Puncher Unit-AT1, 8-69
Reducing paper jam frequency, 8-3
Saddle stitcher unit, 8-49
Screens indicating locations of paper jams, 8-4
Q
Quiet mode, 2-12
Stack bypass, 8-21
Paper Select Screen Priority, 4-35
Paper stock
Acceptable paper stock, 2-52
Index
9-19
R
Time until Document Auto Erase, 6-73
Shutdown Mode, 1-22
Relationship between original orientation and
preprinted paper output chart, 9-11
Sleep mode, 4-37
Stack bypass
Remote User Interface (Remote UI), 2-4, 6-17
About the stack bypass, 1-11
Report Settings, 4-13
Auxiliary tray, 2-44
Reset key, 1-15
Paper, 4-46
Restrict Printer Jobs, 6-75
Printing, 2-42
Slide guide, 2-44
Tray extension, 2-44
S
Standard mode, 4-47
Saddle Finisher-AD2
About Saddle Finisher-AD2, 3-3, 3-13
Clearing paper jams, 8-37, 8-40, 8-45, 8-49
Clearing staple jams, 8-76
Clearing staple jams in the saddle stitcher unit,
8-79
Finishing modes, 3-16
Replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle
Appendix
stitcher unit, 7-36
Saddle stitch, 3-20
9
Saddle stitch position adjustment, 4-60
Replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler
unit, 7-32
Saddle stitch staple repositioning, 4-59
Sample reports
Copy log list, 9-2
Device information delivery destination list, 9-4
Device information communication log, 9-5
Print log list, 9-3
Scan key, 2-7
Scanning, definition, xvi
Secure Watermark Mode, 6-60
Send function, 2-3
Send key, 2-7
Service call message, 8-98
Settings for All User Inboxes, 6-73
Print Upon Storing From the Printer Driver,
6-74
9-20
Index
Staple jams
Finisher-AD1/Saddle Finisher-AD2, 8-76
Saddle stitcher unit, 8-79
Start key, 1-14
Stop key, 1-14
Symbols used in this manual, xiii
System configuration, 3-2
System Manager Settings, 6-3
System Monitor key, 2-7
System Monitor Screen Restriction, 6-30
System Settings
About System Settings, 1-27, 4-14
Auto Offline, 6-21
Auto Online, 6-21
Clearing the message board, 6-20
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings, 6-28
Date & Time Settings, 6-23
Department ID Management, 6-5
Device Information Delivery Settings, 6-37
Device Information Settings, 6-19
Display ID/User Name, 6-56
Encrypted Print Settings, 6-57
Initializing All Data/Settings, 6-54
License Registration, 6-25
MEAP Settings, 6-33
Paper Type Management Settings, 6-67
PDL Selection (PnP), 6-72
Remote UI, 6-17
Restrict Printer Jobs, 6-75
Clearing paper jams, 8-4
Secure Watermark Mode, 6-60
Clearing staple jams, 8-76
System Manager Settings, 6-3
Error messages, 8-84
System Monitor Screen Restriction, 6-30
Memory full, 8-95
USB Settings, 6-58
Reducing the frequency of paper jams, 8-3
Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords,
Service call message, 8-98
6-59
When the power does not turn ON, 8-102
System Settings screen, 2-10
T
Test button, 1-12
U
Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output, 4-54
User-defined text for page numbers and
watermarks
Timer Settings
About Timer Settings, 4-11, 4-56
Editing, 4-45
Auto Clear Time, 4-57
Erasing, 4-45
Auto Sleep Time, 4-56
Registering, 4-44
Current date and time, 6-23
USB Settings, 6-58
Daily Timer Settings, 4-58
Time until unit quiets down, 4-57
Toner cartridge
About the toner cartridge, 7-68
W
Appendix
Tone settings, 4-30
Wire Cleaning, 4-66, 7-59
Replacing, 7-45
Touch panel display
About the touch panel display, 1-15, 2-21
Z
Changing the language, 4-48
Zoom Fine Adjustment, 4-59
9
Entering characters, 2-24
Frequently used keys, 2-21
Reversing the contrast, 4-49
Switching functions, 2-6
Touch panel key display, 2-22
Touch panel keys
Drop-down list, 2-23
Mode ON/OFF keys, 2-22
Mode Setting keys, 2-22
Numeric keys, 2-23
Touch panel key display, 2-22
Trademarks, xviii
Troubleshooting
Index
9-21
Appendix
9
9-22
Index
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy
CANON ESPAÑA S.A.
Joaquín Costa, 41 28002 Madrid, Spain
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
USRM1-2066-00
© CANON INC. 2007